CN117015080A - Communication method and communication device - Google Patents

Communication method and communication device Download PDF

Info

Publication number
CN117015080A
CN117015080A CN202210928227.7A CN202210928227A CN117015080A CN 117015080 A CN117015080 A CN 117015080A CN 202210928227 A CN202210928227 A CN 202210928227A CN 117015080 A CN117015080 A CN 117015080A
Authority
CN
China
Prior art keywords
information
timer
start time
time
drx
Prior art date
Legal status (The legal status is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the status listed.)
Pending
Application number
CN202210928227.7A
Other languages
Chinese (zh)
Inventor
刘南南
张阳阳
谢曦
冯淑兰
常俊仁
Current Assignee (The listed assignees may be inaccurate. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation or warranty as to the accuracy of the list.)
Huawei Technologies Co Ltd
Original Assignee
Huawei Technologies Co Ltd
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by Huawei Technologies Co Ltd filed Critical Huawei Technologies Co Ltd
Priority to PCT/CN2023/087495 priority Critical patent/WO2023207576A1/en
Publication of CN117015080A publication Critical patent/CN117015080A/en
Pending legal-status Critical Current

Links

Classifications

    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04WWIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W76/00Connection management
    • H04W76/20Manipulation of established connections
    • H04W76/28Discontinuous transmission [DTX]; Discontinuous reception [DRX]
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04WWIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W52/00Power management, e.g. TPC [Transmission Power Control], power saving or power classes
    • H04W52/02Power saving arrangements
    • H04W52/0209Power saving arrangements in terminal devices
    • H04W52/0225Power saving arrangements in terminal devices using monitoring of external events, e.g. the presence of a signal
    • H04W52/0229Power saving arrangements in terminal devices using monitoring of external events, e.g. the presence of a signal where the received signal is a wanted signal

Landscapes

  • Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Computer Networks & Wireless Communication (AREA)
  • Signal Processing (AREA)
  • Mobile Radio Communication Systems (AREA)

Abstract

A communication method and a communication apparatus in which a terminal device can determine the start timing of a first timer using different information in different superframes (e.g., using first information in a first superframe and second information in a second superframe), and thus the start timing of the first timer may be different in different superframes. The method and the device are beneficial to improving the flexibility of setting the starting time of the first timer, further being beneficial to avoiding the problem that the service period is not matched with the DRX period because the starting time of the first timer is fixed/the same in different superframes, further being beneficial to reducing the power consumption of the terminal equipment and/or reducing the time delay of the terminal equipment for receiving data.

Description

Communication method and communication device
The present application claims priority from the chinese patent application filed on day 29 of 04 month 2022, filed with the chinese national intellectual property agency, application number 202210467612.6, application name "a communication method and communication device", the entire contents of which are incorporated herein by reference.
Technical Field
The embodiment of the application relates to the field of communication, in particular to a communication method and a communication device.
Background
In a wireless communication system, in order to ensure that data can be effectively transmitted and save power consumption of a terminal device, a discontinuous reception (discontinuous reception, DRX) mechanism is introduced to control the behavior of the terminal device to monitor a physical downlink control channel (physical downlink control channel, PDCCH). When the terminal device configures DRX, the terminal device may enter a "sleep state" at some time/time (i.e. not monitor PDCCH), and the terminal device does not need to monitor PDCCH continuously, but wakes up from the sleep state when it needs to monitor PDCCH, so that the terminal device can achieve the purpose of saving power.
In the current communication system, a terminal device may transmit traffic data requiring periodic transmission using a DRX mechanism. Alternatively, a DRX mechanism may be employed between the terminal device and the network device for periodic or near-periodic or regular transmission of traffic data. However, in practical applications, there are cases where the period of a part of the traffic does not match the DRX period, which may cause an increase in power consumption of the terminal device or may cause an increase in delay of receiving data by the terminal device. Thus, current DRX mechanisms require further investigation.
Disclosure of Invention
The application provides a communication method and a communication device, which are used for flexibly setting the starting positions of DRX cycles in different superframes so that the DRX cycles can be matched with service cycles, and further, the terminal equipment can accurately receive service data.
In a first aspect, the present application provides a communication method, in which a terminal device obtains first information, where the first information is different from second information, and the first information is used to determine a start timing of a first timer in a first superframe, and the second information is used to determine a start timing of the first timer in a second superframe. The terminal device then determines a start timing of the first timer in the first superframe based on the first information.
Since the terminal device can calculate the start timing of the first timer in different superframes (i.e. the time of entering the awake state in the DRX cycle in the superframe) by using different information (i.e. the first information and the second information) respectively in different superframes, the value of the start timing of the first timer in different superframes may be different. That is, the start timing of the first timer may be different in different superframes, which is advantageous to improve flexibility in setting the start timing of the first timer. And further, the problem that the data transmission period of the service data is not matched with the DRX period due to the fixed DRX period is solved, and further, the accuracy of receiving the service data of the terminal equipment is improved.
In one possible embodiment, the first information and the second information are different values of the same parameter. The first information and the second information are both values of the parameter a, and the difference is that the value of the first information is a and the value of the second information is b, where a is not equal to b. Optionally, the first information and the second information may be parameters used for determining the start time of the first timer in the conventional technology, and the first information and the second information may also be parameters newly defined in the present application.
In this embodiment, since the first information and the second information are different values of the same parameter, the terminal device only needs to use the different values of the same parameter to bring in the rule for determining the start timing of the first timer to perform calculation, without adding a complex algorithm, and the scheme is simple to implement.
In one possible implementation, the first superframe and the second superframe may be some two superframes within a continuous plurality of superframes, where the connected plurality of superframes includes at least two superframes. The first superframe and the second superframe satisfy the following conditions:
in one possible condition, the first superframe is adjacent to the second superframe. For example, a first superframe is a preceding superframe and a second superframe is a following superframe; alternatively, the second superframe is a preceding superframe and the first superframe is a following superframe.
In another possible condition, the first superframe is separated from the second superframe by at least one superframe. For example, the consecutive plurality of superframes includes at least three superframes, a first superframe being a first superframe of the consecutive plurality of superframes and a second superframe being a third superframe of the consecutive plurality of superframes, the first superframe being spaced from the second superframe by one superframe. For another example, the consecutive plurality of superframes includes at least four superframes, a first superframe being a first superframe of the consecutive plurality of superframes and a second superframe being a fourth superframe of the consecutive plurality of superframes, the first superframe being spaced apart from the second superframe by two superframes.
Alternatively, the consecutive plurality of superframes may be one superframe period, one superframe period including at least two superframes.
In one possible implementation manner, the terminal device acquires first information, including: the terminal equipment determines first information based on the third information; wherein the third information is determined by the terminal device based on the index of the first superframe; alternatively, the third information is from the network device. Optionally, the third information is carried in DCI, MAC CE or RRC signaling.
In one possible example of the present embodiment, the terminal device determines the third information based on the index of the first superframe, and then the terminal device determines the first information based on the third information. In this example, since the terminal device does not need to receive information from the network device, the first information can be determined based on the index of the first superframe, which is beneficial to saving signaling overhead between the terminal device and the network device.
In another possible example of this embodiment, the terminal device receives the third information from the network device, and then the terminal device determines the first information based on the third information. In this example, since the terminal device determines the first information based on the third information from the network device, the terminal device does not need to set complex calculation logic to determine the third information, which is beneficial to reducing the complexity of the terminal device.
In one possible implementation manner, the third information is determined by the terminal device based on the index of the first superframe and N, where N is the number of superframes included in the superframe period, and N is an integer greater than 1.
It should be noted that the information used by the terminal device to determine the start timing of the first timer is different in each of the N superframes. It is also understood that the parameter used by the terminal device to determine the start timing of the first timer has N different values within a variation period (e.g., within a superframe period).
In a possible embodiment, the third information C 1 Index S of first superframe 1 The following conditions are satisfied with N: c (C) 1 =S 1 mod N。
In this embodiment, it is proposed that information (including the first information and the second information) used by the terminal device in different superframes for determining the start timing of the first timer is information having a periodic variation law. Specifically, in two superframes of every interval (N-1) superframes, the terminal device determines the start timing of the first timer using the same information. For example, if the terminal device determines the start timing of the first timer in the 1 st superframe using the information 1 in the 1 st superframe, the terminal device also determines the start timing of the first timer in the (n+1) th superframe using the information 1 in the (n+1) th superframe. Therefore, the terminal device can determine the information for calculating the start timing of the first timer corresponding to each superframe by using modulo arithmetic.
In one possible implementation, the superframe period satisfies the following condition: the superframe period is equal to an integer multiple of the discontinuous reception DRX period corresponding to the first timer.
Since one superframe period includes N superframes, the condition that the superframe period and the DRX period are satisfied may be changed to N, the duration of one superframe, and the condition that the DRX period is satisfied. Specifically, N, the duration of one superframe, and the condition that the DRX cycle satisfies are any one of the following conditions:
the cumulative sum of the duration of the N superframes is equal to an integer multiple of the DRX period corresponding to the first timer; or,
dividing the integral multiple of the DRX period corresponding to the first timer by the duration of one superframe to be equal to N; or,
n is an integer quotient when an integer multiple of the DRX cycle corresponding to the first timer is divided by the duration of one superframe.
Specifically, the network device determines N based on N, the duration of one superframe, and the condition that the DRX cycle satisfies, and then, the network device determines information for determining the start timing of the first timer corresponding to different superframes based on N.
In a possible implementation manner, the first information is a first offset, and the duration indicated by the first offset is smaller than the DRX cycle T DRX . Wherein T is DRX Greater than 0. The first offset is a newly defined parameter of the present application. The first information and the second information are different values of the first offset.
In one example of the present embodiment, the first offset has a positive value or a negative value. When the value of the first offset is positive, the first offset is greater than 0 and less than T DRX Representing shifting one or more time-domain units to the right; when the value of the first offset is negative, the first offset is greater than-T DRX And less than 0, indicating a leftward shift of one or more time-domain units. Alternatively, the value of the first offset may be 0, which indicates no offset. In this embodiment, the value of the first offset may be a positive value, a negative value or 0, and when the terminal device calculates the start time of the first timer, the terminal device performs an addition operation on the first offset and other parameters, and determines whether the terminal device is offset to the left or the right based on the first offset according to the positive or negative value of the first offset.
In another example of the present embodiment, the first offset is non-negative, i.e., the first offset is 0 or more and less than T DRX . In the present embodiment, the value of the first offset is not Negative values, therefore, the terminal device requires an indication from the network device to determine whether the terminal device is to add or subtract based on the first offset with other parameters, and thus whether the terminal device is to shift left or right based on the first offset.
In one possible embodiment, the first information is a value based on an offset of the first parameter. The process of determining the starting time of the first timer in the first superframe by the terminal device based on the first information specifically includes: the terminal device determines a start timing of a first timer in a first superframe based on the first information and the first parameter. Wherein the first parameter is used to indicate a starting position of a DRX cycle configured by the network device in units of subframes. Illustratively, the first parameter is drx-StartOffset.
Specifically, the terminal device increases the value indicated by the first information on the basis of the first parameter configured by the network device, so as to obtain a new value of the first parameter. And then, the terminal equipment brings the new value of the first parameter into a formula for calculating the frame number and the subframe number of the starting time of the first timer to calculate, thereby obtaining the frame number and the subframe number of the starting time of the first timer in the first superframe. Then, the terminal device determines the start timing of the first timer based on the frame number and the subframe number of the start timing of the first timer.
Since the first information and the second information are different values of the same parameter, the terminal device can calculate the start timing of different first timers based on the different values of the first parameter in different superframes. Therefore, the method and the device are beneficial to improving the flexibility of the starting time of the first timer of the terminal equipment, further beneficial to the terminal equipment to adjust the DRX period to be matched with the service period, and improving the accuracy of the terminal equipment to receive the service data.
In one possible embodiment, the first information is a value of an offset based on the first reference value. The process of determining the starting time of the first timer in the first superframe by the terminal device based on the first information specifically includes: the terminal device determines a first reference value based on the first parameter and the second parameter, and then the terminal device determines a start timing of a first timer in the first superframe based on the first reference value and the first information. The first parameter is used for indicating a starting position of the DRX period configured by the network equipment in units of subframes, and the second parameter is used for indicating an offset of the terminal equipment in units of time slots, which is used when the starting time of the first timer is calculated. Illustratively, the first parameter is drx-StartOffset and the second parameter is drx-SlotOffset.
Optionally, the determining, by the terminal device, information related to a start timing of the first timer in the first superframe based on the first reference value and the first information includes: the first timer is started after the first information starting from the first reference value.
In this embodiment, the terminal device may calculate a reference value (i.e., a first reference value) of the start timing of the first timer based on the first parameter, the second parameter, and the formula in the conventional art, and then the terminal device performs the offset based on the first information on the basis of the first reference value. Since the first information and the second information are different values of the same parameter, the start timing of the first timer of the first superframe obtained by the terminal device shifting based on the first information on the basis of the first reference value is different from the start timing of the first timer of the second superframe obtained by the terminal device shifting based on the second information on the basis of the first parameter value. Thus, the terminal device can determine the start timing of the different first timers in different superframes. Therefore, the method and the device are beneficial to improving the flexibility of the starting time of the first timer of the terminal equipment, further beneficial to the terminal equipment to adjust the DRX period to be matched with the service period, and improving the accuracy of the terminal equipment to receive the service data.
In one possible embodiment, the first information is a value based on an offset of the second parameter. The process of determining the starting time of the first timer in the first superframe by the terminal device based on the first information specifically includes: the terminal device determines a start timing of the first timer in the first superframe based on the second parameter and the first information.
In this embodiment, the terminal device determines a new value of the second parameter by comparing the value of the second parameter configured by the network device with the first information, and performs an offset based on the new value of the second parameter on the basis of the frame number and the subframe number of the start timing of the first timer. Since the first information and the second information are different values of the same parameter, the terminal device can calculate the start timing of different first timers based on the different values of the second parameter in different superframes. Therefore, the method and the device are beneficial to improving the flexibility of the starting time of the first timer of the terminal equipment, further beneficial to the terminal equipment to adjust the DRX period to be matched with the service period, and improving the accuracy of the terminal equipment to receive the service data.
In one possible implementation, the first information is a first parameter. The first parameter is used to indicate a starting position in subframes of a DRX cycle configured by the network device. Illustratively, the first parameter is drx-StartOffset. The terminal device can make the starting time of the first timer in different superframes different by using different values of the first parameter in different superframes.
In one possible embodiment, the first information is a second parameter. The second parameter is an offset in one or more time slots used in calculating the start opportunity of the first timer. Illustratively, the first parameter is drx-StartOffset. The terminal device can make the starting time of the first timer in different superframes different by using different values of the second parameter in different superframes.
In one possible embodiment, the method further comprises: the terminal device determines the index of the first superframe according to one of:
the terminal equipment determines the index of the first superframe according to the first indication information; or the terminal equipment determines the index of the first superframe according to the first indication information and the first time information; wherein the first indication information is from the network device, and the first time information includes information of a time when the terminal device acquires the DRX configuration. The information of the time for the terminal device to acquire the DRX configuration may be a time or a time range.
In one possible embodiment, the method further comprises: the terminal device receives first indication information from the network device, the first indication information being used to determine an index of the first superframe.
Optionally, the first indication information is carried in a DRX configuration. That is, the network device also transmits first indication information when transmitting the DRX configuration to the terminal device, where the first indication information is used to indicate a location of a time domain unit of the DRX configuration transmitted by the network device to the terminal device in a superframe where the time domain unit is located.
In this embodiment, the network device can indicate, to the terminal device, the position of the time domain unit of the DRX configuration sent by the network device in the superframe where the time domain unit is located through the first indication information, so that the terminal device is beneficial to aligning, based on the first indication information, the time domain unit where the time point where the network device sends the DRX configuration is located with the time domain unit where the time point where the terminal device obtains the DRX configuration, so as to ensure that the terminal device and the network device are synchronous in time domain, and further facilitate improving the accuracy of receiving service data by the terminal device.
In one possible implementation, the first indication information is used to instruct the network device to transmit the DRX configuration in the second half of the superframes, or the first indication information is used to instruct the network device to transmit the DRX configuration in the first half of the superframes.
Optionally, the first indication information is information of a reference frame. Optionally, the value of the first indication information is 512 or 0.
In one possible implementation, the first superframe is a superframe where a terminal device obtains a DRX configuration.
In one possible implementation, the determining, by the terminal device, an index of the first superframe includes:
if the first indication information indicates that the network device transmits the DRX configuration in the second half of the superframes, and the moment when the terminal device acquires the DRX configuration is in the first half of the superframes, the terminal device determines that the index of the first superframe is (L+1); or,
the moment when the terminal equipment acquires the DRX configuration is in the second half of the first superframe, and the terminal equipment determines that the index of the first superframe is L; or,
if the first indication information indicates that the network device transmits the DRX configuration in the first half of the superframes, the terminal device determines that the index of the first superframe is L;
wherein L represents an index of a superframe where a network device transmits the DRX configuration, and L is greater than or equal to 0.
In one possible implementation, the first timer is a discontinuous reception continuous timer. For example, drx-onDurationTimer.
In a second aspect, the present application provides a communication method, wherein a network device is capable of determining first information, and is also capable of transmitting the first information to a terminal device. The first information is different from the second information, the first information is used for determining the starting time of the first timer in the first superframe, and the second information is used for determining the starting time of the first timer in the second superframe.
Optionally, the first timer is a discontinuous reception (drx-onduration timer).
In one possible embodiment, the first information and the second information are different values of the same parameter.
In one possible embodiment, the network device transmits third information to the terminal device, the third information being used by the terminal device to determine the first information. Optionally, the third information is carried in DCI, MAC CE or RRC signaling.
In one possible implementation, the first information is a first offset, and the duration indicated by the first offset is less than the DRX cycle.
In one possible embodiment, the first information is a first parameter, which is drx-StartOffset.
In one possible implementation, the first information is a second parameter, and the first parameter is drx-SlotOffset.
In one possible implementation, the network device sends first indication information to the terminal device, where the first indication information is used to determine an index of the first superframe.
In one possible implementation, the first indication information is used to instruct the network device to transmit the DRX configuration in the second half of the superframes, or the first indication information is used to instruct the network device to transmit the DRX configuration in the first half of the superframes.
Optionally, the first indication information is information of a reference frame. Optionally, the value of the first indication information is 512 or 0.
In one possible implementation, the first superframe is a superframe where a terminal device obtains a DRX configuration.
It should be noted that, the embodiments and the beneficial effects of the present aspect are similar to some of the embodiments in the first aspect, and specific reference may be made to the embodiments and the beneficial effects of the first aspect, which are not repeated herein.
In a third aspect, the present application provides a communication method, wherein a terminal device obtains fourth information, where the fourth information includes information of a start timing of an mth first timer, and M is an integer greater than or equal to 0; then, the terminal device determines information of start timing of the P-th first timer based on the fourth information, P being an integer greater than 0, P being greater than M.
Optionally, the first timer is a discontinuous reception (drx-onduration timer).
In one possible embodiment, the information of the start timing of the mth first timer includes information of the following time domain units: frames and subframes; or, frames, subframes, and slots; or a frame, a subframe, a slot, and a symbol.
In one possible embodiment, the information of the start opportunity of the P-th first timer includes information of the following time domain units: frames and subframes; or, frames, subframes, and slots; or a frame, a subframe, a slot, and a symbol.
In one possible implementation manner, the determining, by the terminal device, information of a start timing of the P-th first timer based on the fourth information includes: the terminal device determines information of start time of the P first timer based on the fourth information and the first period, wherein the first period is equal to the cumulative sum of the N DRX periods. Wherein N is equal to (P-M). Alternatively, when M is equal to 0, N is equal to P.
In one possible embodiment, the terminal device determines the start timing of the P-th first timer according to the following condition:
the remainder of dividing the sum of the first number and the cumulative sum of (P-M) DRX cycles by the second number is equal to the third number.
The first number is the number of time domain units between the starting position of the superframe where the Mth first timer is located and the starting time of the Mth first timer; the second number is the number of time domain units contained in one superframe; the third number is the number of time domain units between the start position of the superframe where the P first timer is located and the start time of the P first timer.
In a possible implementation manner, the determining, by the terminal device, a start timing of the P-th first timer includes:
the terminal equipment determines a first quantity and a second quantity based on fourth information; then, the terminal device determines the remainder of dividing the sum of the first number and the accumulated sum of (P-M) DRX cycles by the second number to obtain a third number; the terminal device then determines information about the start time of the first timer in the P-th DRX cycle based on the third number.
In a possible embodiment, when the fourth information includes a frame number SFN of the frame in which the start time domain unit is located start time And the subframe number Q of the starting time domain unit start time And the terminal equipment determines the information of the starting time of the P first timer based on the fourth information, and satisfies the following formula 3.1:
[(SFN×10)+Q]=[(SFN start time ×10+Q start time )+N×T DRX ]mod (d×10); (equation 3.1)
The SFN is the frame number of the starting time of the P first timer. Q is the subframe number of the starting time of the P first timer. SFN (SFN) start time Is the frame number of the starting time of the Mth first timer. Q (Q) start time Is the subframe number of the starting time of the Mth first timer. (N X T) DRX ) The first period is a unit of a subframe. T (T) DRX Representing the duration of one DRX cycle. Optionally, aThe DRX cycle is a long DRX cycle (DRX-LongCycle). D is the number of frames that a superframe contains. Illustratively, d=1024, meaning that one superframe includes 1024 frames.
In another possible embodiment, when the fourth information includes a frame number SFN of the frame in which the start time domain unit is located start time Subframe number Q of subframe in which the start time domain unit is located start time Time slot number G of time domain unit start time And the terminal equipment determines the information of the starting time of the P first timer based on the fourth information, and satisfies the following formula 3.2:
the SFN is the frame number of the starting time of the P first timer. Q is the subframe number of the starting time of the P first timer. G is the index of the time slot corresponding to the starting time of the P first timer in one subframe. SFN (SFN) start time Is the frame number of the starting time of the Mth first timer. Q (Q) start time Is the subframe number of the starting time of the Mth first timer. G start time And the index of the time slot corresponding to the starting time of the Mth first timer in one subframe.Is the number of slots contained in one subframe. (N X T) DRX ) The first period is a unit of a subframe. T (T) DRX Representing the duration of one DRX cycle. Alternatively, the DRX cycle is a long DRX cycle (DRX-LongCycle). D is the number of frames that a superframe contains. Illustratively, d=1024, meaning that one superframe includes 1024 frames.
In another possible embodiment, when the fourth information includes a frame number SFN of the frame in which the start time domain unit is located start time And time slot number A of time domain unit start time And the terminal equipment determines the information of the starting time of the P first timer based on the fourth information, and satisfies the following formula 3.3:
the SFN is the frame number of the starting time of the P first timer. Q is the subframe number of the starting time of the P first timer. A is the index of the time slot corresponding to the starting time of the P first timer in a system frame. SFN (SFN) start time Is the frame number of the starting time of the Mth first timer. Q (Q) start time Is the subframe number of the starting time of the Mth first timer. A is that start time And the index of the time slot corresponding to the starting time of the Mth first timer in one system frame. Is the number of slots contained in one subframe. (N X T) DRX ) The first period is a unit of a subframe. T (T) DRX Representing the duration of one DRX cycle. Alternatively, the DRX cycle is a long DRX cycle (DRX-LongCycle). D is the number of frames that a superframe contains. Illustratively, d=1024, meaning that one superframe includes 1024 frames.
In another possible embodiment, when the fourth information includes a frame number SFN of the frame in which the start time domain unit is located start time Subframe number Q of subframe in which the start time domain unit is located start time Time slot number G of time slot where time domain unit is located start time Symbol number (or index of symbol) B of time cell start time And the terminal equipment determines the information of the starting time of the P first timer based on the fourth information, and satisfies the following formula 3.4:
the SFN is the frame number of the starting time of the P first timer. Q is the subframe number of the starting time of the P first timer. G is the index of the time slot corresponding to the starting time of the P first timer in one subframe. B is the start of the P first timerSymbol number of dynamic time. SFN (SFN) start time Is the frame number of the starting time of the Mth first timer. Q (Q) start time Is the subframe number of the starting time of the Mth first timer. G start time And the index of the time slot corresponding to the starting time of the Mth first timer in one subframe. B (B) start time Is the symbol number of the starting time of the Mth first timer.Is the number of slots contained in one subframe.Is the number of slots contained in one frame. (N X T) DRX ) The first period is a unit of a subframe. T (T) DRX Representing the duration of one DRX cycle. Alternatively, the DRX cycle is a long DRX cycle (DRX-LongCycle). D is the number of frames that a superframe contains. Illustratively, d=1024, meaning that one superframe includes 1024 frames. H is the number of symbols contained in one slot. Illustratively, h=14, meaning that one slot includes 14 symbols. Illustratively, h=12, meaning that one slot includes 12 symbols.
In another possible embodiment, when the fourth information includes a frame number SFN of the frame in which the start time domain unit is located start time Time slot number A of time domain unit start time Symbol number (or index of symbol) B of time cell start time And the terminal equipment determines the information of the starting time of the P first timer based on the fourth information, and satisfies the following formula 3.5:
the SFN is the frame number of the starting time of the P first timer. Q is the subframe number of the starting time of the P first timer. A is the index of the time slot corresponding to the starting time of the P first timer in a system frame. B is the symbol number of the starting time of the P first timer. SFN (SFN) start time Is the frame number of the starting time of the Mth first timer. Q (Q) start time Is the subframe number of the starting time of the Mth first timer. A is that start time And the index of the time slot corresponding to the starting time of the Mth first timer in one system frame. B (B) start time Is the symbol number of the starting time of the Mth first timer.Is the number of slots contained in one subframe.Is the number of slots contained in one frame. (N X T) DRX ) The first period is a unit of a subframe. T (T) DRX Representing the duration of one DRX cycle. Alternatively, the DRX cycle is a long DRX cycle (DRX-LongCycle). D is the number of frames that a superframe contains. Illustratively, d=1024, meaning that one superframe includes 1024 frames. H is the number of symbols contained in one slot. Illustratively, h=14, meaning that one slot includes 14 symbols. Illustratively, h=12, meaning that one slot includes 12 symbols.
In one possible implementation, when the fourth information includes an SFN start time And Q start time When the terminal device determines the information of the start time of the P-th first timer by using the following formula 3.6:
[(SFN×10)+Q]=F{[(SFN start time ×10+Q start time )+N×T DRX ]mod (1024×10) }; (equation 3.6)
In another possible embodiment, when the fourth information includes an SFN start time 、Q start time G start time When the terminal device determines the information of the start time of the P-th first timer by using the following formula 3.7:
In another possible embodimentIn when the fourth information includes SFN start time And A start time When the terminal device determines the information of the start time of the P-th first timer by using the following formula 3.8:
in another possible embodiment, when the fourth information includes an SFN start time 、Q start time 、G start time B, B start time When the terminal device determines the information of the start time of the P-th first timer by using the following formula 3.9:
in another possible embodiment, when the fourth information includes an SFN start time 、A start time B, B start time When the terminal device determines the information of the start timing of the P-th first timer using the following formula 3.10:
in another possible embodiment, when the fourth information includes an SFN start time And Q start time When the terminal device determines the information of the start timing of the P-th first timer using the following formula 3.11:
[(SFN×10)+Q]=F{[(SFN start time ×10+Q start time )+N×T DRX ]mod (1024 x 10); (equation 3.11)
In another possible embodiment, when the fourth information includes an SFN start time 、Q start time G start time When the terminal device determines the information of the start timing of the P-th first timer using the following formula 3.12:
in another possible embodiment, when the fourth information includes an SFN start time And A start time When the terminal device determines the information of the start timing of the P-th first timer using the following formula 3.13:
In another possible embodiment, when the fourth information includes an SFN start time 、Q start time 、G start time B, B start time When the terminal device determines the information of the start timing of the P-th first timer using the following formula 3.14:
in another possible embodiment, when the fourth information includes an SFN start time 、A start time B, B start time When the terminal device determines the information of the start timing of the P-th first timer using the following formula 3.15:
f { } in equations 3.6, 3.7, 3.8, 3.9, 3.10, 3.11, 3.12, 3.13, 3.14 and 3.15 may represent a rounding operation. Illustratively, F { } may be a downward rounding operation, e.g., floor () function; or a round-up operation, e.g., ceil () function; it may also be a rounding operation, e.g. round () function. The meaning of the remaining parameters is shown in the corresponding related descriptions of the formulas 3.1, 3.2, 3.3, 3.4 and 3.5, and will not be repeated here.
In a kind ofIn a possible embodiment, when the fourth information includes SFN start time 、Q start time And R is start time When the terminal device determines the information of the start timing of the P-th first timer using the following formula 3.16:
[(SFN×10)+Q+R]=[(SFN start time ×10+Q start time +R start time )+N×T DRX ]mod (1024×10); (equation 3.16)
In another possible embodiment, when the fourth information includes an SFN start time 、Q start time 、G start time R is as follows start time When the terminal device determines the information of the start timing of the P-th first timer using the following formula 3.17:
in another possible embodiment, when the fourth information includes an SFN start time 、A start time And R is start time When the terminal device determines the information of the start timing of the P-th first timer using the following formula 3.18:
in another possible embodiment, when the fourth information includes an SFN start time 、Q start time 、G start time 、B start time R is as follows start time When the terminal device determines the information of the start timing of the P-th first timer using the following formula 3.19:
in another possible embodiment, when the fourth information includes an SFN start time 、A start time 、B start time R is as follows start time When the terminal isThe end device determines the information of the start timing of the P-th first timer using the following formula 3.20:
the meaning of the parameters in the formulas 3.16, 3.17, 3.18, 3.19 and 3.20 refer to the corresponding related descriptions of the formulas 3.1, 3.2, 3.3, 3.4 and 3.5, which are not described herein.
In one possible embodiment, the method further comprises: the terminal device receives second indication information from the network device, wherein the second indication information is used for indicating information of a reference frame, and the information of the reference frame is used for determining information of starting time of the first timer. Optionally, the information of the reference frame includes a frame number of the reference frame. Optionally, the frame number of the reference frame is 512 or 0.
In one possible implementation manner, the determining, by the terminal device, information related to a start timing of the P-th first timer based on the fourth information includes: the terminal device determines information of start time of the P first timer based on the fourth information, the information of the reference frame and the first period, wherein the first period is equal to the cumulative sum of the N DRX periods.
In one possible embodiment, the terminal device determines the start timing of the P-th first timer according to the following condition:
the remainder of dividing the sum of the (P-M) DRX cycles, the fourth number, and the first number by the second number is equal to the third number.
The first number is the number of time domain units between the starting position of the superframe where the Mth first timer is located and the starting time of the Mth first timer; the second number is the number of time domain units contained in one superframe; the third number is the number of time domain units between the starting position of the superframe where the P first timer is located and the starting time of the P first timer; the fourth number is the number of time domain units between the start position of the superframe where the frame indicated by the third indication information is located and the frame indicated by the third indication information.
In one possible implementation manner, the process of determining, by the terminal device, information related to the start timing of the P-th first timer based on the fourth information, the information of the reference frame, and the accumulated sum of the (P-M) DRX cycles may specifically be: the terminal equipment determines a fourth quantity based on the information of the reference frames; then, the terminal device determines the first number and the second number based on the fourth information; then, the terminal device determines the remainder of dividing the sum of the accumulated sum of the first number, the fourth number and the (P-M) DRX cycles by the second number to obtain a third number; the terminal device then determines information about the start time of the first timer in the P-th DRX cycle based on the third number.
In a possible embodiment, when the fourth information includes a frame number SFN of the frame in which the start time domain unit is located start time And the subframe number Q of the starting time domain unit start time And determining the information of the starting time of the P first timer by the terminal equipment based on the fourth information and the information of the reference frame, wherein the information satisfies the following formula 4.1:
[(SFN×10)+Q]=[(SFN reference to ×10)+(SFN start time ×10+Q start time )+N×T DRX ]mod (d×10); (equation 4.1)
Wherein SFN Reference to Frame number of reference frame indicated for the second indication information. The SFN is the frame number of the start timing of the P-th first timer. Q is the subframe number of the starting time of the P first timer. SFN (SFN) start time Is the frame number of the starting time of the Mth first timer. Q (Q) start time Is the subframe number of the starting time of the Mth first timer. (N X T) DRX ) The first period is a unit of a subframe. T (T) DRX Representing the duration of one DRX cycle. Alternatively, the DRX cycle is a long DRX cycle (DRX-LongCycle). D is the number of frames that a superframe contains. Illustratively, d=1024, meaning that one superframe includes 1024 frames.
In another possible embodiment, when the fourth information includes a frame number SFN of the frame in which the start time domain unit is located start time Subframe number Q of subframe in which the start time domain unit is located start time Time slot number G of time domain unit start time And determining the information of the starting time of the P first timer by the terminal equipment based on the fourth information and the information of the reference frame, wherein the information satisfies the following formula 4.2:
wherein SFN Reference to The SFN is the frame number of the start timing of the P-th first timer, which is the frame number of the reference frame indicated by the second indication information. Q is the subframe number of the starting time of the P first timer. G is the index of the time slot corresponding to the starting time of the P first timer in one subframe. SFN (SFN) start time Is the frame number of the starting time of the Mth first timer. Q (Q) start time Is the subframe number of the starting time of the Mth first timer. G start time And the index of the time slot corresponding to the starting time of the Mth first timer in one subframe.Is the number of slots contained in one subframe. (N X T) DRX ) The first period is a unit of a subframe. T (T) DRX Representing the duration of one DRX cycle. Alternatively, the DRX cycle is a long DRX cycle (DRX-LongCycle). D is the number of frames that a superframe contains. Illustratively, d=1024, meaning that one superframe includes 1024 frames.
In another possible embodiment, when the fourth information includes a frame number SFN of the frame in which the start time domain unit is located start time And time slot number A of time domain unit start time And determining the information of the starting time of the P first timer by the terminal equipment based on the fourth information and the information of the reference frame, wherein the information satisfies the following formula 4.3:
wherein SFN Reference to Frame number of reference frame indicated for the second indication information. The SFN is the frame number of the start timing of the P-th first timer. Q is the subframe number of the starting time of the P first timer. A is the index of the time slot corresponding to the starting time of the P first timer in a system frame. SFN (SFN) start time Is the frame number of the starting time of the Mth first timer. Q (Q) start time Is the subframe number of the starting time of the Mth first timer. A is that start time And the index of the time slot corresponding to the starting time of the Mth first timer in one system frame.Is the number of slots contained in one subframe. (N X T) DRX ) The first period is a unit of a subframe. T (T) DRX Representing the duration of one DRX cycle. Alternatively, the DRX cycle is a long DRX cycle (DRX-LongCycle). D is the number of frames that a superframe contains. Illustratively, d=1024, meaning that one superframe includes 1024 frames.
In another possible embodiment, when the fourth information includes a frame number SFN of the frame in which the start time domain unit is located start time Subframe number Q of subframe in which the start time domain unit is located start time Time slot number G of time slot where time domain unit is located start time Symbol number (or index of symbol) B of time cell start time And determining the information of the starting time of the P first timer by the terminal equipment based on the fourth information and the information of the reference frame, wherein the information satisfies the following formula 4.4:
wherein SFN Reference to The SFN is the frame number of the start timing of the P-th first timer, which is the frame number of the reference frame indicated by the second indication information. Q is the subframe number of the starting time of the P first timer. G is the index of the time slot corresponding to the starting time of the P first timer in one subframe. B is the symbol number of the starting time of the P first timer. SFN (SFN) start time Is the frame number of the starting time of the Mth first timer.Q start time Is the subframe number of the starting time of the Mth first timer. G start time And the index of the time slot corresponding to the starting time of the Mth first timer in one subframe. B (B) start time Is the symbol number of the starting time of the Mth first timer.Is the number of slots contained in one subframe.Is the number of slots contained in one frame. (N X T) DRX ) The first period is a unit of a subframe. T (T) DRX Representing the duration of one DRX cycle. Alternatively, the DRX cycle is a long DRX cycle (DRX-LongCycle). D is the number of frames that a superframe contains. Illustratively, d=1024, meaning that one superframe includes 1024 frames. H is the number of symbols contained in one slot. Illustratively, h=14, meaning that one slot includes 14 symbols. Illustratively, h=12, meaning that one slot includes 12 symbols.
In another possible embodiment, when the fourth information includes a frame number SFN of the frame in which the start time domain unit is located start time Time slot number A of time slot where time domain unit is located start time Symbol number (or index of symbol) B of time cell start time And determining the information of the starting time of the P first timer by the terminal equipment based on the fourth information and the information of the reference frame, wherein the information satisfies the following formula 4.5:
Wherein SFN Reference to Frame number of reference frame indicated for the second indication information. The SFN is the frame number of the start timing of the P-th first timer. Q is the subframe number of the starting time of the P first timer. A is the index of the time slot corresponding to the starting time of the P first timer in a system frame. B is the symbol number of the starting time of the P first timer. S is SFN start time Is the frame number of the starting time of the Mth first timer. Q (Q) start time Is the subframe number of the starting time of the Mth first timer. A is that start time And the index of the time slot corresponding to the starting time of the Mth first timer in one system frame. B (B) start time Is the symbol number of the starting time of the Mth first timer.Is the number of slots contained in one subframe.Is the number of slots contained in one frame. (N X T) DRX ) The first period is a unit of a subframe. T (T) DRX Representing the duration of one DRX cycle. Alternatively, the DRX cycle is a long DRX cycle (DRX-LongCycle). D is the number of frames that a superframe contains. Illustratively, d=1024, meaning that one superframe includes 1024 frames. H is the number of symbols contained in one slot. Illustratively, h=14, meaning that one slot includes 14 symbols. Illustratively, h=12, meaning that one slot includes 12 symbols.
In one possible implementation, when the fourth information includes an SFN start time And Q start time When the terminal device determines the information of the start time of the P-th first timer by using the following formula 4.6:
[(SFN×10)+Q]=F{[(SFN reference to ×10)+(SFN start time ×10+Q start time )+N×T DRX ]mod (1024×10) }; (equation 4.6)
In another possible embodiment, when the fourth information includes an SFN start time 、Q start time G start time When the terminal device determines the information of the start time of the P-th first timer by using the following formula 4.7:
in another possible embodiment, when the fourth information includes an SFN start time And A start time When the terminal device determines the information of the start time of the P-th first timer by using the following formula 4.8:
in another possible embodiment, when the fourth information includes an SFN start time 、Q start time 、G start time B, B start time When the terminal device determines the information of the start time of the P-th first timer by using the following formula 4.9:
in another possible embodiment, when the fourth information includes an SFN start time 、A start time B, B start time When the terminal device determines the information of the start time of the P-th first timer by using the following formula 4.10:
in another possible embodiment, when the fourth information includes an SFN start time And Q start time When the terminal device determines the information of the start time of the P-th first timer by using the following formula 4.11:
[(SFN×10)+Q]=F{[(SFN Reference to ×10)+(SFN start time ×10+Q start time )+N×T DRX ]Mod (1024 x 10); (equation 4.11)
In another possible embodiment, when the fourth information includes an SFN start time 、Q start time G start time When the terminal device determines the information of the start time of the P-th first timer by using the following formula 4.12:
in another possible embodiment, when the fourth information includes an SFN start time And A start time When the terminal device determines the information of the start time of the P-th first timer by using the following formula 4.13:
in another possible embodiment, when the fourth information includes an SFN start time 、Q start time 、G start time B, B start time When the terminal device determines the information of the start time of the P-th first timer by using the following formula 4.14:
in another possible embodiment, when the fourth information includes an SFN start time 、A start time B, B start time When the terminal device determines the information of the start time of the P-th first timer by using the following formula 4.15:
f { } in equations 4.6, 4.7, 4.8, 4.9, 4.10, 4.11, 4.12, 4.14 and 4.15 may represent a rounding operation. Illustratively, F { } may be a downward rounding operation, e.g., floor () function; or a round-up operation, e.g., ceil () function; it may also be a rounding operation, e.g. round () function. The meaning of the remaining parameters is shown in the corresponding related descriptions of the formulas 4.1, 4.2, 4.4 and 4.5, and will not be repeated here.
In one possible implementation, when the fourth information includes an SFN start time 、Q start time And R is start time When the terminal device determines the information of the start time of the P-th first timer by using the following formula 4.16:
[(SFN×10)+Q+R]=[(SFN reference to ×10)+(SFN start time ×10+Q start time )+R start time +N×T DRX ]mod (1024×10); (equation 4.16)
In another possible embodiment, when the fourth information includes an SFN start time 、Q start time 、G start time R is as follows start time When the terminal device determines the information of the start timing of the P-th first timer using the following formula 4.17:
in another possible embodiment, when the fourth information includes an SFN start time 、A start time And R is start time When the terminal device determines the information of the start time of the P-th first timer by using the following formula 4.18:
in another possible embodiment, when the fourth information includes an SFN start time 、Q start time 、G start time 、B start time R is as follows start time When the terminal device determines the information of the start time of the P-th first timer using the following formula 4.19:
in another possible embodiment, when the fourth information includes an SFN start time 、A start time 、B start time R is as follows start time When the terminal device determines the information of the start time of the P-th first timer by using the following formula 4.20:
the meaning of the parameters in the formulas 4.16, 4.17, 4.18, 4.19 and 4.20 refer to the corresponding related descriptions of the formulas 4.1, 4.2, 4.4 and 4.5, which are not described herein.
In a fourth aspect, the present application provides a communication method, where the network device obtains fourth information, where the fourth information includes information of a start timing of an mth first timer, and M is an integer greater than or equal to 0; then, the network device sends fourth information to the terminal device, where the fourth information is used by the terminal device to determine information of a start timing of the P-th first timer based on the fourth information, where P is an integer greater than 0, and P is greater than M.
Optionally, the first timer is a discontinuous reception (drx-onduration timer).
In one possible embodiment, the information of the start timing of the mth first timer includes information of the following time domain units: frames and subframes; or, frames, subframes, and slots; or a frame, a subframe, a slot, and a symbol.
In one possible embodiment, the information of the start opportunity of the P-th first timer includes information of the following time domain units: frames and subframes; or, frames, subframes, and slots; or a frame, a subframe, a slot, and a symbol.
In one possible embodiment, the method further comprises: the network device sends second indication information to the terminal device, wherein the second indication information is used for indicating information of a reference frame, and the information of the reference frame is used for determining information of starting time of the first timer.
Optionally, the information of the reference frame includes a frame number of the reference frame. Optionally, the frame number of the reference frame is 512 or 0.
It should be noted that, the embodiments and the beneficial effects of the present aspect are similar to some of the embodiments in the third aspect, and specific reference may be made to the embodiments and the beneficial effects of the third aspect, which are not described herein.
In a fifth aspect, the present application provides a communication apparatus, which is a terminal device. The communication device includes a processing module. The processing module is used for determining the starting time of the first timer in the first superframe based on the first information. The first information is different from the second information, the first information is used for determining the starting time of the first timer in the first superframe, and the second information is used for determining the starting time of the first timer in the second superframe.
It should be noted that, the embodiments and the beneficial effects of the present aspect are similar to some of the embodiments in the first aspect, and specific reference may be made to the embodiments and the beneficial effects of the first aspect, which are not repeated herein.
In a sixth aspect, the present application provides a communication apparatus, which is a network device. The network device comprises a processing module and a receiving and transmitting module. The processing module is used for determining first information, the first information is different from second information, the first information is used for determining starting time of a first timer in a first super frame, and the second information is used for determining starting time of the first timer in a second super frame. And the receiving and transmitting module is used for transmitting the first information to the terminal equipment.
It should be noted that, the embodiments and the beneficial effects of the present aspect are similar to some of the embodiments in the first aspect, and specific reference may be made to the embodiments and the beneficial effects of the first aspect, which are not repeated herein.
In a seventh aspect, the present application provides a communication apparatus, which is a terminal device. The communication device includes a processing module. The processing module is used for acquiring fourth information, determining information of the starting time of the P first timer based on the fourth information, wherein the fourth information comprises information of the starting time of the M first timer, M is an integer greater than or equal to 0, P is an integer greater than 0, and P is greater than M.
It should be noted that, the embodiments and the beneficial effects of the present aspect are similar to some of the embodiments in the third aspect, and specific reference may be made to the embodiments and the beneficial effects of the third aspect, which are not described herein.
In an eighth aspect, the present application provides a communication apparatus, which is a network device. The communication device comprises a processing module and a receiving and transmitting module. The processing module is used for acquiring fourth information, the fourth information comprises information of starting time of an Mth first timer, and M is an integer greater than or equal to 0; and the transceiver module is used for transmitting fourth information to the terminal equipment, wherein the fourth information is used for determining the information of the starting time of the P first timer based on the fourth information, P is an integer greater than 0, and P is greater than M.
It should be noted that, the embodiments and the beneficial effects of the present aspect are similar to some of the embodiments in the third aspect, and specific reference may be made to the embodiments and the beneficial effects of the third aspect, which are not described herein.
In a ninth aspect, an embodiment of the present application provides a communication apparatus, where the communication apparatus may be a terminal device in the foregoing embodiment, or may be a chip in the terminal device. The communication device may include a processing module and a transceiver module. When the communication device is a terminal device, the processing module may be a processor, and the transceiver module may be a transceiver; the terminal device may further include a storage module, which may be a memory; the storage module is used for storing instructions, and the processing module executes the instructions stored by the storage module, so that the terminal equipment executes the method in the first aspect or any implementation manner of the first aspect; alternatively, the method of the third aspect or any implementation of the third aspect is performed. When the communication device is a chip in the terminal equipment, the processing module may be a processor, and the transceiver module may be an input/output interface, a pin, a circuit, or the like; the processing module executes the instructions stored by the storage module to cause the terminal device to perform the method of the first aspect or any implementation of the first aspect; alternatively, the method of the third aspect or any implementation of the third aspect is performed. The memory module may be a memory module (e.g., register, cache, etc.) within the chip, or may be a memory module (e.g., read-only memory, random access memory, etc.) within the terminal device that is external to the chip.
In a tenth aspect, an embodiment of the present application provides a communication apparatus, which may be a network device in the foregoing embodiment, or may be a chip in the network device. The communication device may include a processing module and a transceiver module. When the communication apparatus is a network device, the processing module may be a processor and the transceiver module may be a transceiver; the network device may further include a storage module, which may be a memory; the storage module is used for storing instructions, and the processing module executes the instructions stored by the storage module, so that the network device executes the second aspect or the method in any implementation manner of the second aspect; alternatively, the method of the fourth aspect or any of the embodiments of the fourth aspect is performed. When the communication device is a chip in the network device, the processing module may be a processor, and the transceiver module may be an input/output interface, a pin, or a circuit, etc.; the processing module executes the instructions stored by the storage module to cause the network device to perform the second aspect or any implementation of the method of the second aspect; alternatively, the method of the fourth aspect or any of the embodiments of the fourth aspect is performed. The memory module may be an on-chip memory module (e.g., register, cache, etc.), or an off-chip memory module (e.g., read-only memory, random access memory, etc.) within the network device.
In an eleventh aspect, the present application provides a communication device, which may be an integrated circuit chip. The integrated circuit chip includes a processor. The processor is coupled to a memory for storing programs or instructions which, when executed by the processor, cause the communications apparatus to perform the method as described in any of the embodiments of the various aspects described above.
In a twelfth aspect, embodiments of the application provide a computer program product comprising instructions which, when run on a computer, cause the computer to perform the method as described in any of the embodiments of the various aspects described above.
In a thirteenth aspect, embodiments of the present application provide a computer-readable storage medium comprising instructions which, when run on a computer, cause the computer to perform a method as described in any one of the embodiments of the previous aspects.
In a fourteenth aspect, an embodiment of the present application provides a communication system, where the communication system includes a terminal device performing any one of the foregoing first aspect and the first aspect, and a network device performing any one of the foregoing second aspect and the second aspect. Or the communication system comprises a terminal device performing any of the foregoing third aspect and the third aspect, and a network device performing any of the foregoing fourth aspect and the fourth aspect.
Drawings
In order to more clearly illustrate the technical solutions of the embodiments of the present application, the drawings that are needed in the description of the embodiments will be briefly introduced below, and it is obvious that the drawings in the description below are only some embodiments of the present application.
Fig. 1A is an example diagram of a DRX cycle;
fig. 1B is another exemplary diagram of a DRX cycle;
FIG. 1C is an exemplary graph of XR cycle versus DRX cycle distribution;
FIG. 2 is a flow chart of a communication method of the present application;
FIG. 3 is a schematic diagram of another embodiment of a communication method according to the present application;
FIG. 4 is a diagram illustrating an example of XR cycle versus DRX cycle distribution in accordance with the present application;
FIG. 5 is a schematic diagram of another embodiment of a communication method according to the present application;
FIG. 6 is a schematic diagram of another embodiment of a communication method of the present application;
FIG. 7 is a schematic diagram of a formula for calculating the start timing of the first timer according to the present application;
fig. 8 is an exemplary diagram of a transmission delay between a network device and a terminal device;
FIG. 9 is a schematic diagram of another embodiment of a communication method of the present application;
FIG. 10 is a schematic diagram of another embodiment of a communication method of the present application;
FIG. 11A is another schematic diagram of a formula for calculating the start timing of a first timer according to the present application;
FIG. 11B is another schematic diagram of a formula for calculating the start timing of the first timer according to the present application;
FIG. 12 is a schematic diagram of an embodiment of a communication device according to the present application;
fig. 13 is a schematic diagram of another embodiment of a communication device according to the present application.
Detailed Description
The following description of the embodiments of the present application will be made clearly and completely with reference to the accompanying drawings, in which it is apparent that the embodiments described are only some embodiments of the present application, but not all embodiments.
The terms "first," "second," "third," "fourth" and the like in the description and in the claims and in the above drawings, if any, are used for distinguishing between similar objects and not necessarily for describing a particular sequential or chronological order. It is to be understood that the terms so used are interchangeable under appropriate circumstances such that the embodiments described herein are capable of operation in other sequences than illustrated or otherwise described herein. Furthermore, the terms "comprises," "comprising," and "having," and any variations thereof, are intended to cover a non-exclusive inclusion, such that a process, method, system, article, or apparatus that comprises a list of steps or elements is not necessarily limited to those steps or elements expressly listed but may include other steps or elements not expressly listed or inherent to such process, method, article, or apparatus.
It should be understood that the term "and/or" is merely an association relationship describing the associated object, and means that three relationships may exist, for example, a and/or B may mean: a exists alone, A and B exist together, and B exists alone. In addition, the character "/" herein generally indicates that the front and rear associated objects are an "or" relationship. In the text description of the present application, the character "/", generally indicates that the associated objects are an or relationship; in the formula or numerical value of the present application, the character "/" indicates that the front and rear associated objects are a "division" relationship.
For easy understanding, the system architecture and application scenario of the communication method proposed in the present application are described below:
the communication method proposed by the present application can be applied to a fifth generation mobile network (5th generation mobile networks,5G) New Radio (NR) system, a sixth generation mobile information technology (the 6th generation mobile communication technology,6G) system, and a subsequent evolution system, which is not limited thereto. The communication system comprises at least a terminal device and/or a network device. The network device may include an access network device or a core network device, among others.
Wherein the terminal device comprises a device for providing voice and/or data connectivity to the user. For example, a handheld device with wireless connectivity or a processing device connected to a wireless modem may be included. The terminal device may communicate with a core network (e.g., a 5G core network (5th generationcore,5GC)) via a radio access network (radio access network, RAN) with which voice and/or data may be exchanged. The Terminal device may also be referred to as a Terminal (Terminal), a User Equipment (UE), a wireless Terminal device, a Mobile Terminal (MT) device, a subscriber unit (subscriber unit), a subscriber station (subscriber station), a Mobile Station (MS), a mobile station (mobile), a remote station (remote station), an Access Point (AP), a remote Terminal device (remote Terminal), an access Terminal device (access Terminal), a user Terminal device (user Terminal), a user agent (user agent), or a user equipment (user device), etc. Further, the terminal device may be a mobile phone (mobile phone), a tablet (Pad), a computer with a wireless transceiving function, a Virtual Reality (VR) device, an augmented reality (augmented reality, AR) device, an augmented reality (XR) service terminal, a Cloud Gaming (CG) service terminal, a wireless terminal in industrial control (industrial control), a wireless terminal in unmanned (self-driving), a wireless terminal in teleoperation (remote medical surgery), a wireless terminal in smart grid (smart grid), a wireless terminal in transportation security (transportation safety), a wireless terminal in smart city (smart city), a wireless terminal in smart home (smart home), or the like. It should be understood that the embodiment of the present application does not limit the specific technology and the specific device configuration adopted by the terminal device. The terminal device in the present application may be any device or chip as described above, and is not limited herein. The terminal device can be manufactured, sold or used as a stand-alone product, whether as a device or as a chip. In this and subsequent embodiments, a terminal device is taken as an example to describe the present embodiment.
An access network device, which may be any device having a radio transceiver function, may be used to take charge of air interface related functions, such as radio link maintenance functions, radio resource management functions, and partial mobility management functions. In addition, the access network device may be further configured with a baseband unit (BBU), and has a baseband signal processing function. The access network device may be, for example, an access network device (radio access network, RAN) currently serving the terminal device. Currently, some common examples of access network devices are: a Node B (Node B, NB), an evolved Node B (eNB), a next generation Node B (next generation Node B, gNB) in a 5G New Radio (NR) system, a Node (e.g., xNodeB) in a 6G system, a transmission reception point (transmission reception point, TRP), a radio network controller (radio network controller, RNC), a base station controller (base station controller, BSC), a base transceiver station (base transceiver station, BTS), a home base station (e.g., home evolved Node (home evolved NodeB) or home Node B, HNB), and the like. Further, in a network structure such as a cloud access network (cloud radio access network, cloudRAN) or an open access network (open radio access network, ora), the access network device may be a device including a Centralized Unit (CU) (also referred to as a control unit) and/or a Distributed Unit (DU). The RAN equipment comprising the CU and the DU splits the protocol layers of the gNB in the NR system, the functions of part of the protocol layers are controlled in the CU in a centralized way, and the functions of the rest part or all of the protocol layers are distributed in the DU, so that the CU controls the DU in a centralized way. It should be understood that the access network device in the embodiment of the present application may be any of the foregoing devices or a chip in the foregoing device, and is not limited specifically herein. The access network device may be manufactured, sold, or used as a stand-alone product, whether as a device or as a chip. In this and subsequent embodiments, access network devices are described as an example.
The core network device refers to a device in a Core Network (CN) that provides service support for the terminal device. Currently, some common examples of core network devices are: access and mobility management function (access and mobility management function, AMF) entities, session management function (session management function, SMF) entities, user plane function (user plane function, UPF) entities, and the like, to name but a few. The AMF entity can be responsible for access management and mobility management of the terminal equipment; the SMF entity may be responsible for session management, such as session establishment for the user, etc.; the UPF entity may be a functional entity of the user plane, mainly responsible for connecting to external networks. It should be noted that, in the present application, an entity may also be referred to as a network element or a functional entity. For example, the AMF entity may also be referred to as an AMF network element or an AMF functional entity; for another example, the SMF entity may also be referred to as an SMF network element or an SMF functional entity, etc.
Specifically, the communication method provided by the application can be applied to the scene that the terminal equipment configured with the DRX mechanism monitors the PDCCH.
For easy understanding, various time domain resources related to the present application are first described below, and then a DRX mechanism in the conventional technology is described below:
In a communication system, time domain resources include: a radio frame (also referred to as a system frame, simply frame), a subframe (subframe), a slot (slot), and a symbol (symbol) (e.g., an orthogonal frequency division multiplexing (orthogonal frequency division multiplexing, OFDM) symbol).
Where a frame is 10ms long, each frame may have a system frame number (system frame number, SFN) (also referred to as a frame index). Illustratively, SFNs range from 0 to 1023, and thus the period of the frame is 1024×10ms=10240 ms. In a 5G NR system, a group of frames having SFN of 0 to 1023 is referred to as one superframe (hyper system frame), i.e., one superframe is equal to 1024 frames, which is equal to 10240ms. For example, there may be one superframe number (hyper system frame number, H-SFN) per superframe.
Further, one frame contains 10 subframes, each of which has a duration of 1ms. One subframe may contain one or more slots. It should be noted that when the sub-carrier space (SCS) is different, there is a difference in the number of slots contained in each frame, and there is a difference in the number of slots contained in each sub-frame, and there is a difference in the duration of each slot. Specifically as shown in Table 1-1. Wherein, For the number of symbols contained in a slot, +.>For the number of slots contained in a frame, +.>Δf=2 for the number of slots contained in one subframe μ 15 denotes a subcarrier spacing in kHz. Optionally, μ represents an index corresponding to a subcarrier spacing, for indicating a subcarrier spacing.
TABLE 1-1
Alternatively, each subframe may have a subframe number (also referred to as an index of a subframe) ranging from 0 to 9.
Alternatively, there may be one slot number per slot. Illustratively, the slot number may be an index (or number) of a slot in one system frame. For example, when the subcarrier spacing is 30kHz, one system frame includes 20 slots, and the slot number ranges from 0 to 19. Alternatively, the time slots within 1 subframe range from 0, or, 0 to 1, or, 0 to 3, or, 0 to 7, or, 0 to 15, or, 0 to 31, or, 0 to 63. For example, when the subcarrier spacing is 30kHz, one system frame includes 10 subframes, each of which includes 2 slots. In this example, the slot number ranges from 0 to 1 in any one of the 10 subframes. For example, when the subcarrier spacing is 60kHz, one system frame includes 10 subframes, each of which includes 4 slots. In this example, the slot number ranges from 0 to 3 in any one of the 10 subframes.
Furthermore, one slot contains 14 or 12 symbols. Wherein the duration of each symbol is related to the duration of the time slot to which the symbol corresponds, i.e. the duration of each symbol is equal to the duration of the time slot in which the symbol is located divided by 14 or 12. Alternatively, the range of symbols within 1 slot is 0-13 or 0-11.
It should be appreciated that the number of time domain resources may be used to measure the time duration, and that one time domain resource may be referred to as a time domain unit. For example, a time domain unit may be a frame, a subframe, a slot, or a symbol. A period of time may be represented by one or more time domain units. It should be noted that the period, timer, offset, etc. related to the present application may be measured by the number of time domain units, or may be measured in milliseconds (ms), sub milliseconds (sub milliseconds), etc.
The following describes a DRX mechanism in the conventional art: as shown in fig. 1A, a typical DRX cycle (DRX cycle) is illustrated. Generally, one DRX cycle mainly includes a wake period (i.e., on-duration) and a sleep period (i.e., opportunity for DRX). The awake period is located before the sleep period, i.e., the awake period is located at a previous part of a DRX cycle, and the sleep period is located at a latter part of the DRX cycle. The wake-up period is a duration period in which the terminal equipment is in a wake-up state and can monitor the PDCCH; the sleep period is a period in which the terminal device does not listen to the PDCCH in order to save power. Typically, the terminal device controls the time to enter the awake period (i.e., the start time of the On-duration) by maintaining a discontinuous reception duration timer (i.e., drx-onduration). When the terminal device starts DRX-onduration timer, it starts a DRX cycle on behalf of the terminal device. Specifically, the terminal device may calculate a start-up time of the drx-onduration timer, where the start-up time refers to a time domain unit where the time of the drx-onduration timer starts. Then, the terminal equipment starts the drx-onduration timer at the start time of the drx-onduration timer. during the drx-onduration timer operation, the terminal device is in a wake-up period.
Specifically, as shown in fig. 1B, the terminal device in the conventional technology calculates the start-up opportunity of drx-onduration timer by the following steps (1) and (2):
(1) The terminal device determines a drx-onduration timer initiated frame number (SFN) and subframe number (subframe number) by the following equation 1 or equation 2:
in the case that the terminal device uses a long DRX cycle (DRX-LongCycle), the terminal device calculates a frame number and a subframe number for DRX-onduration timer start up by equation 1:
[ (sfn×10) +subframe number ] module (drx-LongCycle) =drx-StartOffset; (equation 1)
In the case that the terminal device uses a short DRX cycle (DRX-short cycle), the terminal device calculates a frame number and a subframe number for DRX-onduration timer start up by equation 2:
[ (sfn×10) +subframe number ] module = (drx-StartOffset) module; (equation 2)
(2) After the terminal device obtains the SFN and the subframe number started by the drx-onduration timer through formula 1 or formula 2, the terminal device starts the drx-onduration timer after a duration indicated by the drx-SlotOffset from the subframe start determined according to formula 1 or formula 2.
The parameters related to the step (1) and the step (2) have the following meanings:
and the DRX-LongCycle is used for indicating the duration of the long DRX cycle, the unit is ms, and the value range is 10ms to 10240ms. Optionally, with the development of communication technology, the value range of drx-LongCycle may be extended to 1ms, 0.1ms, 0.01ms, or the like.
DRX-short cycle (optional) for indicating the duration of the short DRX cycle, in ms, ranging from 2ms to 640ms.
It should be understood that the network device may be configured with both long and short DRX cycles, but at the same time the terminal device uses only one of the cycles (long or short DRX cycle) as DRX cycle, i.e. DRX cycle corresponding to DRX-onduration timer.
The DRX-StartOffset, a subframe for indicating the start of the DRX cycle (long DRX cycle or short DRX cycle), is used when calculating the frame number and subframe number of the start timing of the DRX-onduration timer. It will be appreciated that drx-StartOffset is used to determine which subframe of which frame the drx-onDurationTimer starts within. The unit of drx-StartOffset is ms, and the value ranges from 0ms to (drx-Long cycle minus 1 ms) ms.
The drx-SlotOffset is used to indicate the delay before starting the drx-onduration timer, and is the offset in one subframe used when calculating the starting time of the drx-onduration timer. The value of drx-SlotOffset ranges from 0ms to (31/32) ms, and the accuracy is (1/32) ms. It can be understood that after the terminal device determines which subframe of which frame the drx-onduration timer starts based on drx-StartOffset, the terminal device determines which (1/32) ms in the foregoing subframe (i.e., the subframe determined based on drx-StartOffset) starts based on drx-SlotOffset.
Because the values of the parameters of drx-LongCycle, drx-ShortCycle, drx-StartOffset, drx-SlotOffset and the like in different superframes are the same, the starting time of the drx-onduration timer calculated by the terminal device in different superframes according to the above steps is the same, that is, the frame number and the subframe number at which the terminal device starts the drx-onduration timer in different superframes are the same. It can be seen that the distribution of DRX cycles in different superframes is identical.
However, in practical applications, the traffic that needs to be periodically transmitted is independent of the superframe. For example, if one superframe cannot divide the period of the aforementioned traffic, the period of the traffic is not affected by the superframe when the period of the traffic is running across superframes. Meanwhile, the DRX cycle needs to recalculate the start opportunity to start the DRX-onDurationTimer when it spans the superframe. Thus, the period of the aforementioned traffic may be mismatched with the DRX period in the subsequent super frame, which may result in an increase in power consumption of the terminal device or may result in an increase in delay of receiving data by the terminal device.
For ease of understanding, taking XR traffic as an example, the period of XR traffic (hereinafter referred to as XR period) may be a non-integer period. Where the XR period is calculated from a frame generation rate, also referred to as frame rate (frame rate), X (in frames per second (fps)). Specifically, the XR period is the inverse of the frame generation rate X. Typical values for the frame generation rate X are 30fps, 60fps, 90fps, and 120fps. The XR periods calculated based on the aforementioned frame generation rates are respectively:
30fps:(1/30fps)s=(1/30fps)×1000ms=1000/30ms≈33.3333ms
60fps:(1/60fps)s=(1/60fps)×1000ms=1000/60ms≈16.6667ms
90fps:(1/90fps)s=(1/90fps)×1000ms=1000/90ms≈11.1111ms
120fps:(1/120fps)s=(1/120fps)×1000ms=1000/120ms≈8.3333ms
It follows that the XR periods shown in the previous examples are all non-integer periods. If the terminal device receives the data of the XR service by using the DRX mechanism, the aforementioned XR period may be used as the DRX period of the terminal device. However, one superframe cannot divide the XR period.
For ease of understanding, the following is at frame generation rate x=60 fps, and one superframe T H-SFN For example, =10240 ms (i.e. one superframe contains 10240 subframes).
T DRX =T XR-60 = (1≡60 fps) ×1000 ms=1000+.60 ms≡ 16.6667ms; wherein T is DRX Indicating DRX period, T XR-60 The XR period is shown at a frame generation rate of 60 fps.
The number of DRX cycles (or XR cycles) contained within a superframe is:
T H-SFN ÷T XR-60 =10240×60÷1000=614.4。
as shown in fig. 1C, both DRX cycle and XR cycle are T. The XR period in the first superframe may match the DRX period, but after crossing the superframe the XR traffic period and DRX period do not match in the second superframe. Specifically, for XR period T, a portion of one XR period (e.g., 0.4 XR periods) is at the end of the first superframe and another portion of the one XR period (e.g., 0.6 XR periods) is at the front of the second superframe. For the DRX cycle, there are 0.4 DRX cycles at the end of the first superframe, however, according to the existing DRX mechanism, the terminal device restarts one DRX cycle from the second superframe.
Similarly, the number of DRX cycles (or XR cycles) contained within two superframes is:
2×T H-SFN ÷T XR-60 =10240×2×60÷1000=1228.8。
as shown in fig. 1C, specifically, for XR period T, one portion of one XR period (e.g., 0.8 XR period) is at the end of the second superframe and another portion of the one XR period (e.g., 0.2 XR period) is at the front of the third superframe. For the DRX cycle, there are 0.4 DRX cycles at the end of the second superframe, however, according to the existing DRX mechanism, the terminal device restarts one DRX cycle from the third superframe.
Similarly, the distribution rule of XR period/XR service and the distribution rule of DRX period/DRX in each subsequent super frame can be obtained. It is apparent that current DRX mechanisms may lead to problems with DRX cycles/DRX not matching the cycle of traffic/XR traffic in case of cross-superframe. Thus, improvements to the current DRX mechanisms are needed.
In this regard, the present application proposes a communication method for improving the current DRX mechanism, so that the starting position of the DRX cycle or the starting time of the first timer in different superframes can be flexibly set, so that the DRX cycle/DRX can be matched with the service cycle, thereby reducing the power consumption of the terminal device and/or reducing the delay of the terminal device for receiving data. In detail, please refer to the corresponding embodiment of fig. 2.
The communication method proposed by the present application is applicable to other services having a period that cannot be divided by one super frame, in addition to XR services, for example. The communication method provided by the application is applicable to the situation that the DRX period is the period of XR service, and is also applicable to the situation that the DRX period is other periods which cannot be divided by one super frame, and the application is not limited to the use scenario. For example, the DRX period is 50ms, and one DRX period includes 3 start occasions of DRX-ondurationTimer. For example, the DRX cycle is 50ms, and one DRX cycle includes 3 small DRX cycles, which may be 16ms, 17ms, and 17ms, respectively.
It should be noted that the "frame" in the frame generation rate or frame rate is not the same concept as the "frame" in the radio frame or frame number, and there is no relation between the two. Illustratively, a "frame" in a radio frame or frame number is a time domain resource or a time domain concept. Illustratively, the frame generation rate or frame rate refers to the number of still frames that can be displayed per second of the device. For example, a "frame" in a frame generation rate or frame rate represents each picture in a video or animation.
In the present application, the start-up can be understood as/replaced by: start or restart. In the present application, the time of day can be understood as/replaced by: time of day or time of day. In the present application, the leftward shift can be understood as/replaced with: offset rearward. The rightward shift can be understood/replaced by: offset forward. In the present application, the calculation can be understood as/replaced by: and (5) determining.
In the present application, the frame number and the subframe number of the start timing of the first timer can be understood as/replaced with: a frame number and a subframe number related to a start timing of the first timer. The frame number and the subframe number in the frame number and the subframe number of the start timing of the first timer are not necessarily the frame number and the subframe number of the frame and the subframe where the start timing of the first timer is located.
In the present application, acquisition can be understood as/replaced by: determining or receiving or decoding or parsing.
In the present application, the sequence can be understood/replaced as: in turn.
The main flow of one embodiment of the communication method proposed by the present application will be described with reference to fig. 2. In the method, the terminal device performs the following steps:
in step 201, the terminal device obtains first information.
The first information is used for determining a starting time of a first timer in the first superframe. For example, the first information is information used in determining a start timing of the first timer in the first superframe.
It should be noted that the first information may be an existing parameter in the conventional technology, or may be a newly defined parameter in the present application, which is not limited by the present application, and will be described in detail later.
Illustratively, the first timer/duration of the first timer is a period of time at the beginning of the DRX cycle.
Illustratively, the first timer is a discontinuous reception (drx-onduration timer).
The starting time of the first timer is a time domain unit corresponding to the moment of starting the first timer by the terminal device, or the moment of starting the first timer by the terminal device.
For example, since the first timer is generally located in the first half of one DRX cycle, the first timer is started, which can also be understood as the terminal device enters one DRX cycle. It should be understood that the DRX cycle is the DRX cycle corresponding to the first timer, i.e., the DRX cycle in which the first timer is located. The duration of the DRX cycle may be determined based on a parameter DRX-LongCycle indicating a long DRX cycle, may be determined based on a parameter DRX-ShortCycle indicating a short DRX cycle, or may be determined based on other parameters, which is not limited herein.
In addition, a superframe may be understood as a period of a frame (also referred to as a radio frame or a system frame). For example, if the system frame number SFN ranges from 0 to n, (n+1) frames with SFN ranging from 0 to n, where n is an integer greater than 0, may form a superframe. The first superframe includes (n+1) frames. For example, the first superframe is equal to ((n+1) ×10) ms. Illustratively, in a 5G NR system 1024 frames with SFN ranging from 0 to 1023 are considered as one superframe, i.e., one superframe equals 1024 frames, which equals 10240ms.
It should be noted that as communication systems evolve, the range of SFNs may increase or decrease, i.e. the range of SFNs may not be 0-1023, nor may the duration of a superframe equal 10240ms. In the present application, description will be made taking as an example that a superframe includes 1024 frames with SFN of 0 to 1023. For example, the first superframe and a second superframe to be described later include 1024 frames of SFN 0 to 1023.
Illustratively, in addition to the first information, the terminal device is capable of perceiving second information different from the first information or the terminal device is capable of perceiving the first information to be different from the second information.
The second information is used to determine the start timing of the first timer in another superframe (hereinafter referred to as a second superframe) other than the first superframe.
Note that the perception does not represent acquisition. For example, perception may be understood as being known. For example, the terminal device knows the second information different from the first information or the terminal device can perceive the first information to be different from the second information according to the specification of the protocol.
Optionally, the first information and the second information are different values of the same parameter.
The first information and the second information are both values of the parameter a, and the difference is that the first information is a and the second information is b, where a is not equal to b. Alternatively, the first information and the second information may be parameters used for determining the start time of the first timer in the conventional technology, and the first information and the second information may also be parameters newly defined in the present application, which is not limited by the present application, and will be described in detail later.
Alternatively, the first superframe and the second superframe may be some two superframes or any two superframes in a plurality of superframes in succession.
Wherein the consecutive plurality of superframes includes at least two superframes. The first superframe and the second superframe satisfy the condition 1 or the condition 2.
Exemplary: the consecutive superframes may include: and N superframes in succession.
Condition 1: the first superframe is adjacent to the second superframe. For example, a first superframe is a preceding superframe and a second superframe is a following superframe; alternatively, the second superframe is a preceding superframe and the first superframe is a following superframe.
Condition 2: the first superframe is separated from the second superframe by at least one superframe. For example, the consecutive plurality of superframes includes at least three superframes, a first superframe being a first superframe of the consecutive plurality of superframes and a second superframe being a third superframe of the consecutive plurality of superframes, the first superframe being spaced from the second superframe by one superframe. For another example, the consecutive plurality of superframes includes at least four superframes, a first superframe being a first superframe of the consecutive plurality of superframes and a second superframe being a fourth superframe of the consecutive plurality of superframes, the first superframe being spaced apart from the second superframe by two superframes.
Alternatively, condition 2 may include/be replaced with: the first superframe is spaced from the second superframe by greater than or equal to 1 superframe and/or the first superframe is spaced from the second superframe by less than or equal to (N-2) superframes.
Optionally, the first superframe is a superframe where the terminal device obtains the DRX configuration/the first information.
It should be understood that the first superframe and the second superframe are different superframes because the first information and the second information are different information. Accordingly, the start timing of the first timer in the first superframe determined based on the first information and the start timing of the first timer in the second superframe determined based on the second information may be different.
In this embodiment, the terminal device can perceive that the first information is used to determine the start timing of the first timer in the first superframe, and the second information is used to determine the start timing of the first timer in the second superframe, that is, the terminal device can perceive that the different information is used in different superframes (e.g., the first superframe and the second superframe) to determine the start timing of the first timer. Compared with the scheme that the terminal equipment uses the same information to determine the starting time of the first timer in different superframes (for example, the first superframe and the second superframe) in the prior art, the method is beneficial to determining the starting time of different first timers in different superframes and improving the flexibility of the terminal equipment in determining the starting time of the first timer.
It should be noted that, the present application does not limit whether the terminal device obtains the second information, and does not limit whether the terminal device determines the start timing of the first timer in the second superframe according to the second information.
Optionally, the terminal device obtains the first information, including: the terminal device may determine the first information based on the third information.
Optionally, the third information has a correspondence with the first information. For example, the terminal device determines the third information, and the terminal device can further determine the first information used by the terminal device in the first superframe based on the correspondence.
Wherein the third information may be determined by the terminal device based on the index of the first superframe; alternatively, the third information is acquired by the device. For example, the third information is from the network device.
Optionally, the third information may be determined by the terminal device based on the index of the first superframe, and may include: the third information is determined by the terminal device based on the index of the first superframe and N.
N is the number of superframes included in the superframe period, and N is an integer greater than 1. For example, the terminal device determines the third information based on the index of the first superframe and N. For description of N and the superframe period, refer to the corresponding embodiment of fig. 3, and are not described herein.
Illustratively, the terminal device performs a modulo operation based on the index of the first superframe and N to determine the third information.
Illustratively, the remainder of dividing the index of the first superframe by N is third information.
Exemplary, third information C 1 Index S of first superframe 1 The following conditions are satisfied with N: c (C) 1 =S 1 mod N。
For example, the third information may be carried in a cell or signaling such as downlink control information (downlink control information, DCI), a medium access control cell (media access control control element, MAC Control Element, MAC CE) or radio resource control (radio resource control, RRC) signaling, which is not limited by the present application.
Alternatively, the first information and the second information may have different embodiments:
in one possible embodiment (embodiment a), the first information and the second information are different values of the newly defined parameter of the present application, and the present application refers to the newly defined parameter as the first offset, that is, the first information and the second information are different values of the first offset. It should be noted that, the present application will be described by taking the above newly defined parameter as the first offset as an example, which may also be referred to by other names, and the present application is not limited by the present application, and the names thereof do not limit the roles thereof.
Optionally, the duration of the first offset indication is less than or equal to one DRX cycle T DRX Alternatively, the absolute value of the first offset is less than or equal to one DRX period T DRX . Wherein T is DRX Greater than 0.
In one example of embodiment a, the first offset may take a positive or negative value or 0. For example, if the first offset is positive, the first offset is greater than 0 and less than T DRX Representing a shift to the right by one or more time-domain units. For example, if the first offset takes a negative value, the first offset is greater than-T DRX And less than 0, indicating a leftward shift of one or more time-domain units. For example, if the value of the first offset is 0, it indicates no offset.
For example, the value of the first offset may be a positive value, a negative value or 0, and when the terminal device determines the start timing of the first timer, the terminal device may perform addition operation on the first offset and other parameters, and determine whether the start timing of the first timer is offset to the left or to the right according to the positive or negative value of the first offset.
In another example of embodiment A, the first offset is non-negative, i.e., the first offset is greater than or equal to 0 and less than T DRX
For example, the value of the first offset is non-negative, and the terminal device needs an indication of the network device to determine whether the terminal device performs addition or subtraction based on the first offset and other parameters, so as to determine whether the start timing of the first timer is offset to the left or to the right.
For example, the value of the first offset is a non-negative value, and when the terminal device determines the start time of the first timer, the terminal device may perform addition operation on the first offset and other parameters to determine whether the start time of the first timer is offset to the left or to the right.
It should be noted that if the value of the first offset is T DRX or-T DRX Indicating a shift to the left by one DRX cycle or to the right by one DRX cycle or no shift.
In practical applications, any of the foregoing embodiments may be adopted as the first offset, and in this embodiment and the subsequent embodiments, only the first offset may be a positive value, a negative value, or 0, and the addition operation of the first offset and other parameters is described as an example.
In another possible embodiment (embodiment B), the first information and the second information are parameters that are already known in the conventional art for calculating the start timing of the first timer. The parameters for calculating the start timing of the first timer, which are already known in the conventional art, include a first parameter and a second parameter. For example, the first parameter is used to indicate a subframe at which the DRX cycle starts. Illustratively, the first parameter is drx-StartOffset. For example, the second parameter is used to indicate the delay before the drx-onduration timer/first timer is started. Illustratively, the second parameter is drx-SlotOffset.
One possible implementation, the first information and the second information are first parameters. For example, the first information is one value of the first parameter, and the second information is another value of the first parameter.
In another possible implementation, the first information and the second information are second parameters. For example, the first information is one value of the second parameter, and the second information is another value of the second parameter.
Optionally, the duration indicated by the first information/second information/first parameter/second parameter is less than or equal to one DRX cycle T DRX Alternatively, the absolute value of the first information/second information/first parameter/second parameter is less than or equal to one DRX cycle T DRX
In step 202, the terminal device determines a start timing of a first timer in a first superframe based on the first information.
Alternatively, the start timing of the first timer may be represented by one or more time domain units in a frame, a subframe, a slot, or a symbol. Illustratively, the information of the start timing of the first timer includes information of one or more of a frame (e.g., a frame number), a subframe number (e.g., an index of a subframe), a slot (e.g., a slot number), or a symbol (e.g., a symbol number), etc.
Specifically, when the embodiments of the first information are different, the manner in which the terminal device determines the start timing of the first timer in the first superframe based on the first information is also different. The following description will be made with the first information as the existing parameters in the conventional technology or with the first parameter as the newly defined parameters of the present application:
In one class of embodiments (embodiment B), the first information is a parameter existing in the conventional technology.
In one possible embodiment (embodiment b.1), the first information is a first parameter, and the first information and the second information are different values of the first parameter. The terminal device can make the starting time of the first timer in different superframes different by using different values of the first parameter in different superframes.
Illustratively, the terminal device carries the first information into a formula (for example, formula 1 or formula 2 described above) for calculating the frame number and the subframe number of the start timing of the first timer, which contains the first parameter in the conventional art, for calculation. Specifically, the terminal device calculates the frame number and the subframe number related to the start timing of the first timer by taking the first information as the value of the first parameter in the foregoing formula. Then, the terminal equipment obtains the starting time of the first timer based on the frame number and the subframe number of the starting time of the first timer and offset by the duration indicated by the drx-SlotOffset.
In another possible embodiment (embodiment b.2), the first information is a second parameter, and the first information and the second information are different values of the second parameter. The terminal device can make the starting time of the first timer in different superframes different by using different values of the second parameter in different superframes.
Illustratively, the terminal device determines the frame number and the subframe number related to the start timing of the first timer based on the formula (e.g., formula 1 or formula 2 described above) for calculating the frame number and the subframe number related to the start timing of the first timer in the conventional art. Then, the terminal equipment shifts the duration indicated by the first information again based on the frame number and the subframe number related to the starting time of the first timer, and the starting time of the first timer is obtained.
In another class of embodiments (embodiment a), the first information is a newly defined parameter of the present application.
In an example, the first information is a first offset, and the terminal device can make the start timing of the first timer in different superframes different by using different values of the first offset in different superframes. The terminal device may determine the start timing of the first timer in the first superframe by any one of the following embodiments:
in embodiment a.1, the terminal device determines a start timing of the first timer in the first superframe based on the first parameter and the first information.
Illustratively, the first offset is an offset based on the first parameter. Illustratively, the first information is a value based on an offset of the first parameter.
Illustratively, the terminal device determines the start timing of the first timer in the first superframe based on (the first parameter+the first information).
Alternatively, the first parameter may be configured by the network device to the terminal device.
For example, the terminal device increases the value indicated by the first information on the basis of the first parameter to obtain a new value of the first parameter. Then, the terminal device brings the new value of the first parameter into a formula (for example, formula 1 or formula 2 described above) for calculating the frame number and the subframe number of the start timing of the first timer, so as to calculate the frame number and the subframe number of the start timing of the first timer in the first superframe. Then, the terminal device determines the start timing of the first timer based on the frame number and the subframe number of the start timing of the first timer.
For example, in the case where the terminal device uses a long DRX cycle (DRX-LongCycle), the process of the terminal device starting the frame number and the subframe number by the first offset and calculating the DRX-onduration timer may be expressed as formula 1.1:
[ (sfn×10) +subframe number ] module = (drx-startoffset+first offset); (equation 1.1)
For example, in the case where the terminal device uses a short DRX cycle (DRX-short cycle), the process that the terminal device calculates a frame number and a subframe number initiated by DRX-onduration timer through the first offset may be expressed as formula 2.1:
[ (sfn×10) +subframe number ] module = (drx-startoffset+first offset) module; (equation 2.1)
The meaning of each parameter in the formula 1.1 and the formula 2.1 is referred to the corresponding description of fig. 1B, and is not repeated here.
In this embodiment, the terminal device determines a new value of the first parameter by comparing the value of the first parameter with the first information, and calculates the start timing of the first timer based on the new value of the first parameter and equation 1 (or equation 2) in the conventional art. Or, the terminal device calculates the start timing of the first timer based on the first information and equation 1.1 (or equation 2.1). Since the first information and the second information are different values of the same parameter, the terminal device can determine the start timing of different first timers based on the different values of the first parameter in different superframes. Therefore, the method and the device are beneficial to improving the flexibility of the starting time of the first timer of the terminal equipment, further beneficial to the terminal equipment to adjust the DRX period to be matched with the service period or beneficial to the DRX and service matching, further beneficial to reducing the power consumption of the terminal equipment and/or beneficial to reducing the time delay of the terminal equipment for receiving data.
In embodiment a.2, the terminal device determines the first reference value based on the second parameter, and the terminal device determines the start timing of the first timer in the first superframe based on the first reference value and the first information.
Illustratively, the first offset is an offset based on the first reference value. Illustratively, the first information is a value based on an offset of the first reference value.
Alternatively, the first parameter and/or the second parameter may be configured by the network device to the terminal device.
For example, the terminal device carries the first parameter into a formula (for example, formula 1 or formula 2 described above) for calculating the frame number and the subframe number of the start timing of the first timer, so as to calculate the frame number and the subframe number related to the start timing of the first timer in the first superframe. The terminal device then determines a first reference value based on the frame number, the subframe number, and the second parameter. For example, the terminal device shifts the value indicated by the first information on the basis of the first reference value to obtain the start timing of the first timer. It is also understood that the terminal device starts the first timer after the first information starting from the first reference value.
In this embodiment, the terminal device may calculate a reference value (i.e., a first reference value) of the start timing of the first timer based on the first parameter, the second parameter, and equation 1 (or equation 2) in the conventional art, and then the terminal device performs offset based on the first information based on the first reference value. Since the first information and the second information are different values of the same parameter, the start timing of the first timer of the first superframe obtained by the terminal device shifting based on the first information on the basis of the first reference value is different from the start timing of the first timer of the second superframe obtained by the terminal device shifting based on the second information on the basis of the first parameter value. Thus, the terminal device can determine the start timing of the different first timers in different superframes. Therefore, the method and the device are beneficial to improving the flexibility of the starting time of the first timer of the terminal equipment, further beneficial to the terminal equipment to adjust the DRX period to be matched with the service period or beneficial to the DRX and service matching, further beneficial to reducing the power consumption of the terminal equipment and/or beneficial to reducing the time delay of the terminal equipment for receiving data.
In embodiment a.3, the terminal device determines a start timing of the first timer in the first superframe based on the second parameter and the first information.
Illustratively, the terminal device calculates a frame number and a superframe number of the start timing of the first timer according to the conventional technology, and then determines the start timing of the first timer based on the frame number, the superframe number, the second parameter and the first information.
Alternatively, the first parameter and/or the second parameter may be configured by the network device to the terminal device.
For example, the terminal device brings the first parameter into a formula (for example, formula 1 or formula 2 described above) for calculating the frame number and the subframe number of the start timing of the first timer, to calculate the frame number and the subframe number related to the start timing of the first timer. Then, the terminal device shifts the sum of the second parameter and the first information on the basis of the calculated frame number and subframe number to obtain the starting time of the first timer in the first superframe.
For example, the terminal device brings the first parameter configured by the network device into a formula (for example, formula 1 or formula 2 described above) for calculating the frame number and the subframe number of the start timing of the first timer. Then, the terminal device calculates the sum of the value of the second parameter and the first information, and takes the sum of the value of the second parameter and the first information as a new value of the second parameter. Then, the terminal device shifts the new value of the second parameter based on the calculated frame number and subframe number to obtain the starting time of the first timer in the first superframe.
In this embodiment, the terminal device determines a new value of the second parameter according to the value of the second parameter and the first information, and performs offset based on the new value of the second parameter on the basis of the frame number and the subframe number of the start timing of the first timer. Or, the terminal device offsets based on the sum of the second parameter and the first information on the basis of the frame number and the subframe number of the start timing of the first timer. Since the first information and the second information are different values of the same parameter, the terminal device can calculate the start timing of different first timers based on the different values of the second parameter in different superframes. Therefore, the method and the device are beneficial to improving the flexibility of the starting time of the first timer of the terminal equipment, further beneficial to the terminal equipment to adjust the DRX period to be matched with the service period or beneficial to the DRX and service matching, further beneficial to reducing the power consumption of the terminal equipment and/or beneficial to reducing the time delay of the terminal equipment for receiving data.
It should be noted that the present application does not limit how the terminal device determines the start timing of the first timer in the first superframe based on the first information. The method provided by the application is only a possible method, and other methods are possible. The present application also does not limit how the terminal device determines the start timing of the first timer in the second superframe based on the second information.
In this embodiment, the terminal device can calculate the start timing of the first timer in different superframes using different information (e.g., the first information and the second information) respectively, and thus the start timing of the first timer may be different in different superframes. The flexibility of setting the starting time of the first timer is improved. In addition, the method is beneficial to the cycle matching of the DRX and the service or the DRX and the service matching, thereby being beneficial to reducing the power consumption of the terminal equipment and/or reducing the time delay of the terminal equipment for receiving data.
Alternatively, the first information may be obtained by the terminal device from the network device, or may be specified by a protocol, or may be stored by the terminal device itself, or may be obtained by another method, which is not limited by the present application. The first information may be carried in a cell or signaling such as DCI, MAC CE or RRC signaling, which is not limited by the present application. The DRX configuration includes first information and/or third information.
Alternatively, step 201 in this embodiment may be replaced by the terminal device receiving the first information from the network device. Correspondingly, the network device sends the first information to the terminal device. Alternatively, the first information may be determined by the network device. For example, the network device can determine that the terminal device uses the first information to determine a start timing of the first timer within the first superframe. For another example, the network device can determine that the terminal device uses the second information to determine a start timing of the first timer within the second superframe.
Optionally, the present embodiment may further include: the terminal equipment acquires the second information.
Optionally, the present embodiment may further include: the terminal device obtains second information, including: the terminal device may determine the second information based on the sixth information.
Optionally, the present embodiment may further include: the terminal device determines a start timing of the first timer in the second superframe based on the second information.
It should be noted that, the descriptions related to the second information, the sixth information, and the start timing of the first timer in the second superframe may refer to the first information, the third information, and the content related to the start timing of the first timer in the first superframe, which are not described herein. It should be noted that the first information and the second information may be included in the same message or may be included in different messages, and the present application is not limited thereto. It should be noted that the third information and the sixth information may be included in the same message or may be included in different messages, and the present application is not limited thereto.
It should be noted that, in the present application, the information (e.g., the first information or the second information) used in one superframe (e.g., the first superframe or the second superframe) includes one value as an example, the information (e.g., the first information or the second information) used in one superframe (e.g., the first superframe or the second superframe) may further include a set of values or K values (e.g., K is an integer greater than 1. E.g., K is equal to 3 or 9). For example, if the frame generation rate x=60 fps, the service period is 16.6667 … ms, the DRX period is equal to 3 times the service period, that is, the DRX period is 50ms, the DRX period includes 3 small DRX periods (for example, the 3 small DRX periods may be 16ms, 17ms, and the sequence is not limited) in one DRX period or includes 3 first timers (for example, the intervals between the start timings of the 3 first timers are 16ms and 17ms, and the sequence is not limited) in one DRX period, and in the first superframe, the terminal device determines the start timing of the first timer according to the 3 values included in the first information; the 3 values included in the first information are different from the 3 values included in the second information. Optionally, in the second superframe, the terminal device determines the start timing of the first timer according to 3 values included in the second information. Correspondingly, any one or more of the first parameter, the second parameter, and the first offset used in one superframe (for example, the first superframe or the second superframe) may include one value, or may include a set of values or K values.
Alternatively, the information (e.g., the first information and/or the second information) used by the terminal device in the different superframes for determining the start timing of the first timer may be information having a periodic variation law.
In one possible implementation, the terminal device may determine the start timing of the first timer using the same information in two superframes of the interval (N-1) superframes. It is also understood that different superframes may use different information to determine the start timing of the first timer within N consecutive superframes.
For example, if the terminal device uses the information 1 to determine the start timing of the first timer in the 1 st superframe, the terminal device also uses the information 1 to determine the start timing of the first timer in the (n+1) th superframe; if the terminal device determines the start timing of the first timer in the 2 nd superframe using the information 2 in the 2 nd superframe, the terminal device also determines the start timing of the first timer in the (n+2) th superframe using the information 2 in the (n+2) th superframe. Similarly, if the terminal device uses the information i to determine the start timing of the first timer in the i-th superframe, the terminal device also uses the information i to determine the start timing of the first timer in the (n+i) -th superframe. Optionally, i is an integer greater than 0 and less than or equal to N. For example, from the (x+1) th superframe to the (x+i) th superframe, different superframes determine the start timing of the first timer using different information. Wherein X is an integer.
For convenience of description, the present application refers to the aforementioned consecutive N superframes as one superframe period, that is, one superframe period includes N superframes. The information used by the terminal device to determine the start timing of the first timer is different in different ones of the N superframes. It is also understood that the parameter used by the terminal device to determine the start timing of the first timer has N different values within a variation period (e.g., within a superframe period).
Optionally, any one or more of the superframe period, N, information corresponding to each/different superframe (e.g., any one or more of a first parameter corresponding to each/different superframe, a second parameter corresponding to each/different superframe, and a first offset corresponding to each/different superframe) may be configured by a network device to a terminal device, may be predefined by a protocol, or may be acquired by other means, which is not limited by the present application.
It should be noted that, in the present application, the formula of determining the frame number and the subframe number of the start timing of the first timer may be the formula 1 or the formula 2 described above, or may be other formulas, which is not limited by the present application.
The following description will take the example of different first offsets corresponding to different superframes as an example in connection with fig. 3:
In step 301, the network device determines a first offset corresponding to a different superframe.
Step 301 is an optional step.
Alternatively, the different superframes may include each superframe or at least one superframe in a superframe period, or may include at least one superframe.
In this embodiment, different superframes may be replaced with one or more superframes. It is understood that two superframes of different superframes may correspond to the same first offset or may correspond to different first offsets.
The superframe period may be determined based on the DRX period.
Alternatively, the DRX cycle may be determined based on the traffic cycle.
Illustratively, the DRX cycle is equal to or about equal to the traffic cycle. For example, the DRX cycle is: any one of 1000/30ms, 1000/60ms, 1000/90ms, 1000/120ms, 33.3333ms, 16.6667ms, 11.1111ms, 8.3333 ms. For example, the duration of the DRX cycle is equal to or about equal to the duration of the traffic cycle.
Illustratively, the DRX cycle is equal to K times the traffic cycle. K is an integer greater than 1. For example, K is equal to 3 or 9, for example, if the frame generation rate x=30 fps, the traffic period is 1000/30ms, and the DRX period is equal to 3 times the traffic period, i.e., the DRX period is equal to 100ms. For example, if the frame generation rate x=60 fps, the traffic period is 1000/60ms, and the DRX period is equal to 3 times the traffic period, i.e., the DRX period is equal to 50ms. For example, if the frame generation rate x=90 fps, the traffic period is 1000/90ms, and the DRX period is equal to 9 times the traffic period, i.e., the DRX period is equal to 100ms. For example, if the frame generation rate x=120 fps, the traffic period is 1000/120ms, and the DRX period is equal to 3 times the traffic period, i.e., the DRX period is equal to 25ms.
In one possible implementation, the superframe period and DRX period satisfy the following conditions: the superframe period is equal to an integer multiple of the DRX period.
Since one superframe period includes N superframes, the condition that the superframe period and the DRX period are satisfied may be changed to N, the duration of one superframe, and the condition that the DRX period is satisfied. Specifically, N, the duration of one superframe, and the DRX cycle satisfy any one of the following conditions:
the duration of the N superframes is equal to an integer multiple of the DRX cycle; or,
the integer multiple of the DRX cycle divided by the duration of one superframe equals N; or,
n is an integer quotient when an integer multiple of the DRX cycle is divided by the duration of one superframe.
Optionally, the network device determines N based on N, the duration of one superframe, and the condition that the DRX cycle is satisfied. Optionally, the network device determines the first offset corresponding to the different superframes based on the N and/or DRX cycle.
For ease of understanding, the following describes N, duration of one superframe, and conditions satisfied by the DRX cycle, taking XR traffic of various frame generation rates as an example:
exemplary, if the frame generation rate x=30fps, and one superframe T H-SFN =10240 ms, then T DRX Equal to T XR-30 = (1/30 fps) ×1000 ms=1000/30 ms. The number of DRX cycles (or XR cycles) contained within a superframe is: t (T) H-SFN ÷T XR-30 =T H-SFN ÷T DRX =10240×30++1000=307.2. Since 5 times 0.2 is an integer, 5 superframes can divide the DRX cycle, N equals 5.
Exemplary, if the frame generation rate x=60 fps, and one superframe T H-SFN =10240 ms, then T DRX Equal to T XR-60 = (1 ≡60 fps) ×1000 ms=1000/60 ms. The number of DRX cycles (or XR cycles) contained within a superframe is: t (T) H-SFN ÷T XR-60 =T H-SFN ÷T DRX =10240×60++1000=614.4. Since 5 times 0.4 is an integer, 5 superframes can divide the DRX cycle by a whole, N being equal to 5.
Exemplary, if the frame generation rate x=90 fps, and one superframe T H-SFN =10240 ms, then T DRX Equal to T XR-90 = (1/90 fps) ×1000 ms=1000/90 ms. The number of DRX cycles (or XR cycles) contained within a superframe is: t (T) H-SFN ÷T XR-90 =T H-SFN ÷T DRX =10240×90++1000=921.6. Since 5 times 0.6 is an integer, 5 superframes can divide the DRX cycle by a whole, N being equal to 5.
Exemplary, if the frame generation rate x=120 fps, and one superframe T H-SFN =10240 ms, then T DRX Equal to T XR-120 = (1 ≡120 fps) ×1000 ms=1000/120 ms. The number of DRX cycles (or XR cycles) contained within a superframe is: t (T) H-SFN ÷T XR-120 =T H-SFN ÷T DRX =10240×120++1000= 1228.8. Since 5 times of 0.8 is an integerThe DRX cycle can be divided by 5 superframes, N being equal to 5.
It should be understood that, in practical applications, if the service of the terminal device uses other frame generating rates, the number of superframes included in one superframe period, i.e., N, may be determined according to the foregoing steps based on the other frame generating rates. And in particular are not listed here.
For example, after the network device determines N, the network device may determine a first offset corresponding to a different superframe based on N.
Taking XR services of various frame generation rates as an example, the following describes the first offsets corresponding to different superframes:
for example, if the frame generation rate x=60 fps, it can be seen from the foregoing:
the number of DRX cycles (or XR cycles) contained within a superframe is: t (T) H-SFN ÷T XR-60 =T H-SFN ÷T DRX =10240×60++1000=614.4. As shown in fig. 4, for the XR periods, there are 0.4 XR periods at the end of the first superframe and 0.6 XR periods at the front of the second superframe; thus, in the second superframe, the start timing of the first timer may be shifted to the right by 0.6 DRX cycles or the start timing of the first timer may be shifted to the left by 0.4 DRX cycles.
Similarly, the number of DRX cycles (or XR cycles) contained within two superframes is: 2 xT H-SFN ÷T XR-60 =2×T H-SFN ÷T DRX =2×10240×60++1000= 1228.8. As shown in fig. 4, for the XR periods, 0.8 XR periods are located at the end of the second superframe and 0.2 XR periods are located at the front of the third superframe; therefore, in the third superframe, the start timing of the first timer may be shifted to the right by 0.2 DRX cycles or the start timing of the first timer may be shifted to the left by 0.8 DRX cycles.
Similarly, the number of DRX cycles (or XR cycles) contained within three superframes is: 3 xT H-SFN ÷T XR-60 =3×T H-SFN ÷T DRX =3×10240×60++1000=1843.2. As shown in FIG. 4, for the XR period, there are 0.2 XR periods at the end of the third superframe and 0.8 XR period bitsAt the front end of the fourth superframe; therefore, in the fourth superframe, the start timing of the first timer may be shifted to the right by 0.8 DRX cycles or the start timing of the first timer may be shifted to the left by 0.2 DRX cycles.
Similarly, the number of DRX cycles (or XR cycles) contained within four superframes is: 4 xT H-SFN ÷T XR-60 =4×T H-SFN ÷T DRX =4×10240×60++1000=2457.6. As shown in fig. 4, for the XR periods, 0.6 XR periods are located at the end of the fourth superframe and 0.4 XR periods are located at the front end of the fifth superframe; accordingly, in the fifth superframe, the start timing of the first timer may be shifted to the right by 0.4 DRX cycles or the start timing of the first timer may be shifted to the left by 0.6 DRX cycles.
As can be seen from the following table 2-1, the content of the first offset indication corresponding to the i-th superframe among the n superframes if the frame generation rate x=60 fps, where i=1, 2,3,4 or 5.
TABLE 2-1
In the example shown in table 2-1, if the first offset value may be a positive value, a negative value, or 0. In the first superframe, the value of the first offset is 0 (indicating no offset); in the second super frame, the value of the first offset is +0.6T XR-60 (indicating a rightward shift of 0.6T) XR-60 ) or-0.4T XR-60 (indicating a shift to the left of 0.4T) XR-60 ) The method comprises the steps of carrying out a first treatment on the surface of the In the third super frame, the first offset has a value of +0.2T XR-60 (indicating a rightward shift of 0.2T) XR-60 ) or-0.8T XR-60 (indicating a shift to the left of 0.8T) XR-60 ) The method comprises the steps of carrying out a first treatment on the surface of the In the fourth superframe, the first offset has a value of +0.8T XR-60 (indicating a rightward shift of 0.8T) XR-60 ) or-0.2T XR-60 (indicating a shift to the left of 0.2T) XR-60 ) The method comprises the steps of carrying out a first treatment on the surface of the In the fifth superframe, the first offset has a value of +0.4T XR-60 (indicating a rightward shift of 0.4T) XR-60 ) or-0.6T XR-60 (indicating a shift to the left of 0.6T) XR-60 )。
Similarly, if the frame generation rate x=30fps, the content of the first offset indication corresponding to the i-th superframe of the n superframes is shown in table 2-2 below, where i=1, 2,3,4 or 5.
TABLE 2-2
Similarly, if the frame generation rate x=90 fps, the content of the first offset indication corresponding to the i-th superframe of the n superframes is shown in the following table 2-3, where i=1, 2,3,4 or 5.
Tables 2 to 3
Similarly, if the frame generation rate x=120 fps, the content of the first offset indication corresponding to the i-th superframe of the n superframes is shown in the following tables 2-4, where i=1, 2,3,4 or 5.
Tables 2 to 4
It should be understood that, in practical applications, if the service of the terminal device uses other frame generating rates, the network device may determine the first offset corresponding to each of the N superframes according to the foregoing content based on the other frame generating rates. And in particular are not listed here.
In step 302, the terminal device obtains first offsets corresponding to different superframes.
For example, the first offsets corresponding to the different superframes may be configured by the network device to the terminal device, may be predefined by a protocol, or may be determined by other means (e.g., the terminal device is determined based on the above method), and the present application is not limited.
For example, the network device sends first offsets corresponding to different superframes to the terminal device; accordingly, the terminal device receives the first offsets corresponding to the different superframes from the network device.
Optionally, the present application further includes: the terminal equipment acquires an index of a first offset corresponding to the first offset.
For example, the index of the first offset may be configured by the network device to the terminal device, may be predefined by a protocol, or may be determined by other means, and the application is not limited.
Optionally, the first offset has a correspondence with an index of the first offset.
Optionally, the network device sends the corresponding relation between the first offset and the index of the first offset to the terminal device.
In one possible example of the present embodiment, since one superframe period includes N superframes, which correspond to N first offsets one by one, there may be indexes of the N first offsets. For example, the network device may set N values as indexes of N first offsets. Illustratively, the index of the first offset may be 0, 1, …, (N-1), or 1, …, (N-1), N. Taking N equal to 5 as an example, the index of the first offset includes 0, 1, 2, 3, and 4, and 5 values in total.
For example, if the frame generation rate x=60 fps, the correspondence between the first offset and the index of the first offset may be as shown in the following table 3-1:
TABLE 3-1
Index of first offset First offset amount
0 0
1 +0.6T XR-60 Or, -0.4T XR-60
2 +0.2T XR-60 Or, -0.8T XR-60
3 +0.8T XR-60 Or, -0.2T XR-60
4 +0.4T XR-60 Or, -0.6T XR-60
In the example shown in Table 3-1, if the index of the first offset is 0, the first offset is 0; if the index of the first offset is 1, the first offset is +0.6T XR-60 Or, -0.4T XR-60 . And so on, are not described in detail herein.
In another possible example of the present embodiment, since one superframe period includes N superframes, N-1 superframes correspond to N-1 first offsets one by one, there may be indexes of N-1 first offsets. Illustratively, the value of the first offset of a part of the superframes (e.g., the first superframe) in one superframe period may be 0, and the terminal device does not need to perform an offset operation based on the first offset. The network device may not send the first offset value of 0 to the terminal device.
For example, one superframe period includes N superframes, where the N superframes correspond to the N first offsets one by one, and a value of one of the N first offsets is 0. Thus, the network device may set (N-1) values as indexes for the first offsets of the (N-1) non-zero values. Illustratively, the index of the first offset may be 0, 1, …, (N-2), or 1, …, (N-1). Taking N equal to 5 as an example, the index of the first offset includes 1, 2, 3, and 4, or 0, 1, 2, 3, for a total of 4 values, each representing a non-zero first offset.
For example, if the frame generation rate x=60 fps, the correspondence between the first offset and the index of the first offset may be as shown in the following table 3-2:
TABLE 3-2
Index of first offset First offset amount
0 +0.6T XR-60 Or, -0.4T XR-60
1 +0.2T XR-60 Or, -0.8T XR-60
2 +0.8T XR-60 Or, -0.2T XR-60
3 +0.4T XR-60 Or, -0.6T XR-60
In the example shown in Table 3-2, if the index of the first offset is 1, the first offset is +0.6T XR-60 Or, -0.4T XR-60 The method comprises the steps of carrying out a first treatment on the surface of the If the index of the first offset is 2, the first offset is +0.2T XR-60 Or, -0.8T XR-60 . And so on, are not described in detail herein.
It should be understood that, in practical applications, the terminal device may also determine the index of the first offset corresponding to each superframe in a superframe period in other manners, which are not specifically listed here.
Alternatively, the terminal device may receive the correspondence between the first offset and the index of the first offset from the network device, and then the terminal device stores the correspondence containing the first offset in the terminal device, so that the terminal device can determine the value of the first offset used in a superframe before entering a certain superframe.
For example, if the correspondence is the example shown in the foregoing table 3-1, the terminal device will store the correspondence shown in the foregoing table 3-1.
When the terminal device determines the start timing of the first timer of a certain superframe, the terminal device may directly perform step 304a; the terminal device may also execute step 304b after acquiring the index indication information in step 303.
Step 303, the network device sends index indication information to the terminal device; accordingly, the terminal device receives index indication information from the network device.
Step 303 is an optional step.
Wherein the index indication information is used for indicating an index of a first offset used in one superframe. Optionally, the index indication information is used to indicate an index of the first offset used by the terminal device in the next superframe. Wherein, the next super frame refers to the super frame after the super frame where the terminal device obtains the index indication information.
Optionally, the index indication information may be carried in downlink control information DCI, or may be carried in a medium access control cell MAC CE, or may be carried in a radio resource control RRC message, or may be carried in another message or cell, which is not limited herein.
For example, if the index indication information is implemented using the index of the first offset shown in table 3-2, the index indication information may be carried in 2 bits in DCI.
Optionally: the index indication information may be an index of the first offset, or the index indication information is associated with an index of the first offset.
For example, the index indication information has a correspondence relationship with the index of the first offset.
The third information may be a value of an index of the first offset.
After the terminal device has performed step 303, the terminal device will then perform step 304b.
In step 304a, the terminal device determines a first offset corresponding to the different superframes based on the index of the different superframes.
For example, the terminal device will determine the index of the first offset based on the index of one superframe and N. For example, the terminal device determines a first offset corresponding to the index of the first offset based on the index of the first offset and the correspondence.
In one possible embodiment, the index C of the first offset and the index S of the superframe H-SFN The following conditions are satisfied with N: c=s H-SFN mod N. The terminal device may calculate a remainder of dividing the index of the superframe by N, where the remainder is an index of the first offset corresponding to the superframe.
Taking the corresponding relation as table 3-1 as an example, if c=0, the terminal device determines that the value of the first offset is 0 according to the corresponding relation; if c=1, the terminal device determines that the value of the first offset is +0.6t according to the corresponding relationship XR-60 Or, -0.4T XR-60 The method comprises the steps of carrying out a first treatment on the surface of the If c=2, the terminal device determines that the value of the first offset is +0.2t according to the corresponding relationship XR-60 Or, -0.8T XR-60 The method comprises the steps of carrying out a first treatment on the surface of the If c=3, the terminal device determines that the value of the first offset is +0.8t according to the corresponding relationship XR-60 Or, -0.2T XR-60 The method comprises the steps of carrying out a first treatment on the surface of the If c=4, the terminal device determines that the value of the first offset is +0.4t according to the corresponding relationship XR-60 Or, -0.6T XR-60
In step 304b, the terminal device determines a first offset corresponding to the next superframe based on the index indication information.
Step 304b is an optional step.
Illustratively, after the terminal device acquires the index indication information, the terminal device determines a first offset corresponding to the index of the first offset indicated by the index indication information, and determines the first offset as an offset used for determining a start timing of the first timer in a next superframe.
For example, taking the corresponding relation as table 3-1 as an example, if the index indication information is 0, the terminal device determines that the value of the first offset corresponding to the next superframe is 0 according to the corresponding relation; if the index indication information is 1, the terminal device determines that the value of the first offset corresponding to the next superframe is +0.6T according to the corresponding relation XR-60 Or, -0.4T XR-60 The method comprises the steps of carrying out a first treatment on the surface of the If the index indication information is 2, the terminal device determines that the value of the first offset corresponding to the next superframe is +0.2T according to the corresponding relation XR-60 Or, -0.8T XR-60 The method comprises the steps of carrying out a first treatment on the surface of the If the index indication information is 3, the terminal device determines that the value of the first offset corresponding to the next superframe is +0.8T according to the corresponding relation XR-60 Or, -0.2T XR-60 The method comprises the steps of carrying out a first treatment on the surface of the If the index indication information is 4, the terminal device determines that the value of the first offset corresponding to the next superframe is +0.4T according to the corresponding relation XR-60 Or, -0.6T XR-60 . Optionally, when the index indication information is 0, the network device may not send the index indication to the terminal device to save signaling overhead.
In step 305, the terminal device determines the start timing of the first timer in the different superframes based on the first offsets corresponding to the different superframes.
For example, the terminal device determines the start timing of the first timer in the different superframes based on the first parameter and the first offset used by the different superframes. For example, the initial value of the first parameter is drx-StartOffset0.
For example, the terminal device determines the start timing of the first timer in the different superframe based on the second parameter and the first offset used by the different superframe. For example, the initial value of the second parameter is drx-SlotOffset0.
For example, the terminal device determines a start timing of the first timer in the different superframe based on the first parameter, the second parameter, and the first offset used by the different superframe.
In this embodiment, when the parameters acted by the first offset are different, the process of determining the start timing of the first timer by the terminal device is different. The following description will be made with reference to embodiments 1 to 3, respectively:
in embodiment 1, the first offset is an offset based on the first parameter, that is, the first offset is an offset acting on the first parameter. For example, the terminal device updates an initial value of the first parameter by using the first offset to obtain an updated value of the first parameter; then, the terminal device determines the start timing of the first timer using the updated value of the first parameter and a formula (e.g., formula 1 or formula 2 described above) for calculating the start timing of the first timer in the conventional art.
Exemplary, with DRX period equal to T XR-60 The initial value of the first parameter is drx-StartOffset0, and the value of the first offset is +0.6T XR-60 As an example. The updated value of the first parameter obtained by the terminal equipment based on the initial value of the first parameter and the value of the first offset is drx-StartOffset0+0.6T XR-60 . The terminal device then updates the updated value of the first parameter (i.e., drx-StartOffset0+0.6T XR-60 ) Carry over to equation 1, i.e., [ (SFN) 1 ×10)+subframe number 1 ]modulo(T XR-60 )=drx-StartOffset0+0.6T XR-60 . The frame number calculated to obtain the starting time of the first timer is SFN 1 The subframe number is subframe number 1 . The terminal device then determines the slave frame number as SFN 1 And the subframe number is subframe number 1 After a second parameter of the start of a subframe of (a) starts the first timer.
In embodiment 2, the first offset is an offset based on the first reference value, that is, the first offset is an offset acting on the first reference value. For example, the first reference value is determined by the terminal device based on the first parameter and the second parameter. For example, the terminal device first determines an initial value of the start timing of the first timer based on the first parameter and a formula (e.g., formula 1 or formula 2 described above) for calculating the start timing of the first timer in the conventional art and the second parameter. Then, the terminal device determines a start timing of the first timer of the superframe based on the initial value of the start timing of the first timer and the first offset.
Exemplary, with DRX period equal to T XR-60 The first parameter is drx-StartOffset, the second parameter is drx-SlotOffset, and the first offset has a value of +0.6T XR-60 As an example. The terminal device brings the first parameter (i.e. drx-StartOffset) into equation 1, i.e. (SFN) 2 ×10)+subframe number 2 ]modulo(T XR-60 ) =drx-StartOffset. The frame number calculated to obtain the starting time of the first timer is SFN 2 The subframe number is subframe number 2 . The terminal device then determines that the frame number is SFN 2 And the subframe number is subframe number 2 The subframe of the first timer delays the second parameter to obtain the starting time of the first timer as an initial value of drx-onDurationTimer0. Then, the terminal device obtains the start timing of the first timer of the superframe as (drx-ondurationTimer0+0.6T) based on the start timing of the first timer as an initial value and the first offset XR-60 )。
In embodiment 3, the first offset is an offset based on the second parameter, i.e., the first offset is an offset acting on the second parameter. It can also be understood that the terminal device updates the initial value of the second parameter by using the first offset to obtain an updated value of the second parameter; then, the terminal device shifts the updated value of the second parameter on the basis of the frame number and the subframe number calculated according to the formula in the conventional art (for example, formula 1 or formula 2 described above) to obtain the start timing of the first timer of the superframe.
Exemplary, with DRX period equal to T XR-60 The first parameter is drx-StartOffset, and the first offset takes +0.6T XR-60 As an example. The updated value of the second parameter obtained by the terminal equipment based on the initial value of the second parameter and the value of the first offset is drx-StartOffset0+0.6T XR-60 . The terminal device then brings the first parameter into equation 1, i.e., [ (SFN) 3 ×10)+subframe number 3 ]modulo(T XR-60 ) =drx-StartOffset. The frame number calculated to obtain the starting time of the first timer is SFN 3 The subframe number is subframe number 3 . The terminal device then determines that the frame number is SFN 3 And the sonThe frame number is subframe number 3 At subframe deferral (drx-slotoffset0+0.6T) XR-60 ) A first timer is started for each time slot.
In this embodiment, since the first offset is determined based on the DRX cycle, which is determined based on the traffic cycle, the first offset is based on the traffic cycle. Therefore, the starting time of the first timer calculated by adopting the first offset can enable the DRX period to be matched with the service period or be beneficial to the DRX and service matching, thereby being beneficial to reducing the power consumption of the terminal equipment and/or reducing the time delay of the terminal equipment for receiving data.
It should be understood that, in this embodiment, the first offsets corresponding to different superframes may also be manually configured to the network device, or predefined by the protocol, or stored in the terminal device, which is not limited by the present application. Step 301, step 302 and step 303, step 304b are optional steps. It should be noted that, the step 303 and the step 304b may be implemented as separate embodiments. It should be noted that, the step 302 and the step 304a may be implemented as independent embodiments.
The following description will take the example of the first parameters corresponding to different superframes as an example in connection with fig. 5:
in step 501, the network device determines a first parameter corresponding to a different superframe.
Step 501 is an optional step.
For explanation of the superframe period, DRX period, and N, refer to the description of step 301, and are not repeated here.
In the conventional art, the value of the first parameter used in each superframe is the same. For example, in this embodiment, the network device may configure N first parameters for N superframes in the superframe period, where the N superframes correspond to the N first parameters one by one.
Optionally, the network device determines N based on N, the duration of one superframe, and the condition that the DRX cycle is satisfied. Optionally, the network device determines the first parameter corresponding to the different superframes based on N.
The process of determining N by the network device based on N, the duration of one superframe and the condition that the DRX cycle is satisfied in the foregoing step 301 is described in detail, which is not repeated herein.
For example, after the network device determines N, the network device may determine a first parameter corresponding to a different superframe based on N.
In one possible implementation, the network device determines a first offset for different superframes based on N, and then determines a first parameter for each superframe based on the first offset for each superframe. For the calculation process of the first offset, please refer to the aforementioned step 301, and the description is omitted here.
For example, the network device may determine the first parameter for each superframe based on the first parameter for a first superframe of the N superframes and the first offset for a different superframe of the N superframes. For example, the first parameter of the second superframe is the sum of the first parameter of the first superframe and the first offset of the second superframe. For another example, the first parameter of the third superframe is a sum of the first parameter of the first superframe and the first offset of the third superframe. And so on, the network device may determine the first parameter corresponding to a different superframe of the N superframes.
For example, drx-StartOffset0 is the first parameter of the first superframe of the N superframes.
For ease of understanding, the frame generation rate x=60 fps, n=5, and the first parameters corresponding to the i-th superframe of the N superframes are described as table 4-1 below, where i=1, 2,3,4, or 5.
TABLE 4-1
Similarly, if the frame generation rate x=30fps, and n= 5,N, the first parameter corresponding to the i-th superframe of the superframes is shown in table 4-2 below, where i=1, 2,3,4, or 5.
TABLE 4-2
Similarly, if the frame generation rate x=90 fps, and n= 5,N, the first parameters corresponding to the i-th superframe of the superframes are shown in the following table 4-3, where i=1, 2,3,4, or 5.
TABLE 4-3
Similarly, if the frame generation rate x=120 fps, and n= 5,N, the first parameters corresponding to the i-th superframe of the superframes are shown in the following tables 4-4, where i=1, 2,3,4, or 5.
Tables 4 to 4
It should be understood that, in practical applications, if the service of the terminal device uses other frame generation rates, the network device may determine the first parameter corresponding to each of the N superframes according to the foregoing steps based on the other frame generation rates. And in particular are not listed here.
In step 502, the terminal device obtains first parameters corresponding to different superframes.
For example, the first parameters corresponding to the different superframes may be configured by the network device to the terminal device, may be predefined by a protocol, or may be determined by other means, and the present application is not limited.
For example, the network device sends first parameters corresponding to different superframes to the terminal device; accordingly, the terminal device receives the first parameters corresponding to the different superframes from the network device.
Optionally, the present application further includes: the terminal equipment acquires the index of the first parameter corresponding to the first parameter.
For example, the index of the first parameter may be configured by the network device to the terminal device, may be predefined by a protocol, or may be determined by other means, and the application is not limited.
Optionally, the first parameter has a correspondence with an index of the first parameter.
Optionally, the network device sends the corresponding relation between the first parameter and the index of the first parameter to the terminal device.
Optionally, since one superframe period includes N superframes, the N superframes correspond to the N first parameters one by one. For example, the network device may set N values as indexes of N first parameters. Illustratively, the index of the first parameter may be 0, 1, …, (N-1), or 1, …, (N-1), N. Taking N equal to 5 as an example, the index of the first parameter includes 0, 1, 2, 3, and 4, and 5 values in total.
For example, if the frame generation rate x=60 fps, the correspondence between the first parameter and the index of the first parameter may be as shown in the following table 5-1:
TABLE 5-1
In the example shown in Table 5-1, if the index of the first parameter is 0, the first parameter is drx-StartOffset0; if the index of the first parameter is 1, the first parameter is drx-StartOffset0+0.6T XR-60 Or, drx-StartOffset0-0.4T XR-60 . And so on, are not described in detail herein.
Alternatively, the terminal device may receive the correspondence between the first parameter and the index of the first parameter from the network device, and then the terminal device stores the correspondence containing the first parameter in the terminal device, so that the terminal device can determine the first parameter used in the superframe before entering a certain superframe.
For example, if the correspondence is the example shown in the foregoing table 5-1, the terminal device will store the correspondence shown in the foregoing table 5-1.
When the terminal device needs to determine the start timing of the first timer of a certain superframe, the terminal device may directly perform step 504a; the terminal device may also perform step 504b after obtaining the index indication information in step 503.
Step 503, the network device sends index indication information to the terminal device; accordingly, the terminal device receives index indication information from the network device.
Step 503 is an optional step.
Wherein the index indication information is used to indicate an index of a first parameter used in one superframe. Optionally, the index indication information is used to indicate an index of the first parameter used by the terminal device in the next superframe. Wherein, the next super frame refers to the super frame after the super frame where the terminal device obtains the index indication information.
Optionally, the index indication information may be carried in downlink control information DCI, or may be carried in a medium access control cell MAC CE, or may be carried in a radio resource control RRC message, or may be carried in another message or cell, which is not limited herein.
For example, if the index indication information is implemented using the index of the first parameter shown in table 5-1, the index indication information may be carried in 3 bits in DCI.
Optionally: the index indication information may be an index of the first parameter or the index indication information is associated with the index of the first parameter.
For example, the index indication information has a correspondence relationship with the index of the first parameter.
The third information may be a value of an index of the first parameter.
After the terminal device has performed step 503, the terminal device will then perform step 504b.
In step 504a, the terminal device determines a first parameter corresponding to the different superframes based on the index of the different superframes.
For example, the terminal device will determine the index of the first parameter based on the index of one superframe and N. For example, the terminal device determines the first parameter corresponding to the index of the first parameter based on the index of the first parameter and the correspondence.
In one possible implementation, the index C of the first parameter and the index S of the superframe H-SFN The following conditions are satisfied with N: c=s H-SFN mod N. The terminal device can calculateThe index of the superframe is divided by the remainder of N, where the remainder is the index of the first parameter corresponding to the superframe.
Taking the corresponding relation as table 5-1 as an example, if c=0, the terminal device determines that the value of the first parameter is drx-StartOffset0 according to the corresponding relation; if c=1, the terminal device determines that the value of the first parameter is drx-StartOffset0+0.6t according to the corresponding relation XR-60 Or drx-StartOffset0-0.4T XR-60 The method comprises the steps of carrying out a first treatment on the surface of the If c=2, the terminal device determines that the value of the first parameter is drx-StartOffset0+0.2t according to the correspondence XR-60 Or, drx-StartOffset0-0.8T XR-60 The method comprises the steps of carrying out a first treatment on the surface of the If c=3, the terminal device determines that the value of the first parameter is drx-StartOffset0+0.8t according to the corresponding relation XR-60 Or, drx-StartOffset0-0.2T XR-60 The method comprises the steps of carrying out a first treatment on the surface of the If c=4, the terminal device determines that the value of the first parameter is drx-StartOffset0+0.4t according to the correspondence XR-60 Or, drx-StartOffset0-0.6T XR-60
In step 504b, the terminal device determines a first parameter corresponding to the next superframe based on the index indication information.
Step 504b is an optional step, i.e. the terminal device performs step 504b after the network device performs step 503.
After the terminal device obtains the index indication information, the terminal device determines a first parameter corresponding to the index of the first parameter indicated by the index indication information, and determines the first parameter as an offset used for determining a start time of the first timer in a next superframe.
For example, taking the corresponding relation as table 5-1 as an example, if the index indication information is 0, the terminal device determines that the value of the first parameter corresponding to the next superframe is drx-StartOffset0 according to the corresponding relation; if the index indication information is 1, the terminal device determines that the value of the first parameter corresponding to the next superframe is drx-StartOffset0+0.6T according to the corresponding relation XR-60 Or, drx-StartOffset0-0.4T XR-60 The method comprises the steps of carrying out a first treatment on the surface of the If the index indication information is 2, the terminal device determines that the value of the first parameter corresponding to the next superframe is drx-StartOffset0+0.2T according to the corresponding relation XR-60 Or, drx-StartOffset0-0.8T XR-60 The method comprises the steps of carrying out a first treatment on the surface of the If the index indication information is 3, the terminal device determines that the value of the first parameter corresponding to the next superframe is drx-StartOffset0+0.8T according to the corresponding relation XR-60 Or, drx-StartOffset0-0.2T XR-60 The method comprises the steps of carrying out a first treatment on the surface of the If the index indication information is 4, the terminal device determines that the value of the first parameter corresponding to the next superframe is drx-StartOffset0+0.4T according to the corresponding relation XR-60 Or, drx-StartOffset0-0.6T XR-60
In step 505, the terminal device determines the start timing of the first timer in the different superframes based on the first parameters corresponding to the different superframes.
In one possible implementation, the terminal device determines the start timing of the first timer in the different superframe based on the second parameter and the first parameter used by the different superframe.
For example, the terminal device brings the first parameter of a certain superframe into a formula (for example, formula 1 or formula 2 described above) for calculating the start timing of the first timer in the conventional technology, obtains the frame number and the subframe number of the start timing of the first timer, and then determines the start timing of the first timer of the superframe based on the frame number and the subframe number of the start timing of the first timer and the second parameter.
Exemplary, with DRX period equal to T XR-60 N=5, and the first parameter corresponding to each superframe is shown in table 4-1. Takes the value of the first parameter as drx-StartOffset0+0.6T XR-60 The second parameter configured by the network device is, for example, drx-SlotOffset 0. The terminal device can determine that the first parameter corresponding to the superframe is drx-StartOffset0+0.6T XR-60 . The terminal device then takes the value of the first parameter (i.e. drx-StartOffset0+0.6T XR-60 ) Carry over to equation 1, i.e., [ (SFN) 1 ×10)+subframe number 1 ]modulo(T XR-60 )=drx-StartOffset0+0.6T XR-60 . The frame number calculated to obtain the starting time of the first timer is SFN 1 The subframe number is subframe number 1 . The terminal device then determines the slave frame number as SFN 1 And the subframe number is subframe number 1 After a second parameter of the start of a subframe of (a) starts the first timer.
In this embodiment, since the first parameter is determined based on the DRX cycle, which is determined based on the traffic cycle, the first parameter is based on the traffic cycle. Therefore, the starting time of the first timer calculated by adopting the first parameter can enable the DRX period to be matched with the service period or is beneficial to the DRX and service matching, thereby being beneficial to reducing the power consumption of the terminal equipment and/or reducing the time delay of the terminal equipment for receiving data.
It should be understood that the first parameters corresponding to different superframes in this embodiment may also be manually configured to the network device, or predefined by the protocol, or stored in the terminal device, which is not a limitation of the present application. Step 501, step 502 and step 505, step 504b are optional steps. It should be noted that, the step 505 and the step 504b may be implemented as independent embodiments. It should be noted that, the step 502 and the step 504a may be implemented as independent embodiments.
It should be noted that, the content of the second parameter corresponding to the different superframes that is different and relevant is similar to the content of the first parameter corresponding to the different superframes in the embodiment of fig. 5, and the second parameter in the embodiment of fig. 5 may be replaced by the first parameter for understanding, which is not repeated herein.
In the application, the terminal equipment can use different parameters to calculate the starting time of the first timer in different superframes, and can also use a newly defined formula to determine the starting time of the first timer. The details will be described below in connection with fig. 6:
step 601, the terminal device receives fourth information from the network device; accordingly, the network device transmits fourth information to the terminal device.
Illustratively, the fourth information is used to indicate a time domain position of the starting time domain unit. The start time domain unit is a time domain unit for calculating a start timing of the first timer. It is understood that the start time domain unit is a reference for calculating the start timing of the first timer.
Alternatively, the starting time domain unit may be any one of a subframe, a slot, and a symbol.
Optionally, the fourth information includes information of at least one of a subframe number, a slot number, and a symbol number and information of a frame number. The symbol number may also be referred to as an index of the symbol.
In a possible embodiment, if the start time domain unit indicated by the fourth information is a subframe, the fourth information includes a frame number SFN of a frame in which the start time domain unit is located start time And the subframe number Q of the starting time domain unit start time . For example, the frame number is SFN start time The number of the sub-frame in the frame is Q start time May be the start timing of the first timer. The fourth information is illustratively expressed as { SFN start time ;Q start time Network device or terminal device based on SFN start time And Q start time The start timing of the first timer is calculated. Optionally, the fourth information further includes R start time . The fourth information is illustratively expressed as { SFN start time ;Q start time ;R start time Network device or terminal device based on SFN start time 、Q start time And R is start time The start timing of the first timer is calculated.
In another possible embodiment, if the start time domain unit indicated by the fourth information is a time slot, the fourth information includes a frame number SFN of a frame in which the start time domain unit is located start time Subframe number Q of subframe in which the start time domain unit is located start time Time slot number G of starting time domain unit start time . Wherein, the time slot number G start time Representing the index of a slot in one subframe. For example, the frame number is SFN start time Subframe number Q start time And the time slot number is G start time May be the start opportunity of the first timer. The fourth information is illustratively expressed as { SFN start time ;Q start time ;G start time Network device or terminal device based on SFN start time 、Q start time And G start time The start timing of the first timer is calculated. Optionally, the fourth information further includes R start time . Exemplary, fourth information meansIs { SFN } start time ;Q start time ;G start time ;R start time Network device or terminal device based on SFN start time 、Q start time 、G start time And R is start time The start timing of the first timer is calculated.
In another possible embodiment, if the start time domain unit indicated by the fourth information is a time slot, the fourth information includes a frame number SFN of a frame in which the start time domain unit is located start time Time slot number a of starting time domain unit start time . Wherein, the time slot number A start time Representing the index of a slot in a system frame. For example, the frame number is SFN start time And the time slot number is A start time May be the start opportunity of the first timer. The fourth information is illustratively expressed as { SFN start time ;A start time Network device or terminal device based on SFN start time And A start time The start timing of the first timer is calculated. Optionally, the fourth information further includes R start time . The fourth information is illustratively expressed as { SFN start time ;A start time ;R start time Network device or terminal device based on SFN start time 、A start time And R is start time The start timing of the first timer is calculated.
In another possible embodiment, if the start time domain unit indicated by the fourth information is a symbol, the fourth information includes a frame number SFN of a frame in which the start time domain unit is located start time Subframe number Q of subframe in which the start time domain unit is located start time Time slot number G of time slot where the starting time domain unit is located start time Symbol number B of the starting time domain unit start time . Wherein, the time slot number G start time Representing the index of a slot in one subframe. For example, the frame number is SFN start time Subframe number Q start time Time slot number G start time And the symbol number is B start time The sign of (c) may be the start timing of the first timer. The fourth information is illustratively expressed as { SFN start time ;Q start time ;G start time ;B start time Network device or terminal device based on SFN start time 、Q start time 、G start time And B start time The start timing of the first timer is calculated. Optionally, the fourth information further includes R start time . The fourth information is illustratively expressed as { SFN start time ;Q start time ;G start time ;B start time ;R start time Network device or terminal device based on SFN start time 、Q start time 、G start time 、B start time And R is start time The start timing of the first timer is calculated.
In another possible embodiment, if the start time domain unit indicated by the fourth information is a symbol, the fourth information includes a frame number SFN of a frame in which the start time domain unit is located start time Time slot number A of time slot where time domain unit is located start time Symbol number B of the starting time domain unit start time . Wherein, the time slot number A start time Representing the index of a slot in a system frame. For example, the frame number is SFN start time Time slot number A start time And the symbol number is B start time The sign of (c) may be the start timing of the first timer. The fourth information is illustratively expressed as { SFN start time ;A start time ;B start time Network device or terminal device based on SFN start time 、A start time And B start time The start timing of the first timer is calculated. Optionally, the fourth information further includes R start time . The fourth information is illustratively expressed as { SFN start time ;A start time ;B start time ;R start time Network device or terminal device based on SFN start time 、A start time 、B start time And R is start time The start timing of the first timer is calculated.
In another possible embodiment, if the start time domain unit indicated by the fourth information is a subframe, the fourth information includes W start time . For example, the fourth information is used to indicate a subframe at which the DRX cycle starts. Exemplary, fourth information or W start time Is drx-StartOffset. Alternatively, W start time May be greater than or equal to the DRX cycle, or may be less than the DRX cycle, without limitation. The fourth information is used to indicate the number of subframes between the start position of the superframe where the mth first timer is located and the start timing of the mth first timer. The fourth information is represented as { W } start time W-based network device or terminal device start time The start timing of the first timer is calculated.
In another possible embodiment, if the start time domain unit indicated by the fourth information is a time slot, the fourth information includes U start time . For example, the fourth information is used to indicate a slot at which the DRX cycle starts. Exemplary, fourth information or U start time Is drx-StartOffset. Optionally, U start time May be greater than or equal to the DRX cycle, or may be less than the DRX cycle, without limitation. The fourth information is used to indicate the number of time slots between the start position of the superframe where the mth first timer is located and the start timing of the mth first timer. The fourth information is represented as { U } start time U-based network device or terminal device start time The start timing of the first timer is calculated.
In another possible embodiment, if the start time domain unit indicated by the fourth information is a symbol, the fourth information includes V start time . For example, the fourth information is used to indicate a slot at which the DRX cycle starts. Exemplary, fourth information or V start time Is drx-StartOffset. Alternatively, V start time May be greater than or equal to the DRX cycle, or may be less than the DRX cycle, without limitation. The fourth information is used to indicate the number of symbols between the start position of the superframe where the mth first timer is located and the start timing of the mth first timer. The fourth information is represented as { V }, exemplary start time V-based network device or terminal device start time The start timing of the first timer is calculated.
It should be appreciated that, in practical applications, the fourth information may be implemented in any of the foregoing embodiments, which is not limited herein.
Illustratively, the fourth information includes information of a start timing of the mth first timer. M is an integer greater than or equal to 0. For example, M is 1. It is also understood that the time domain position indicated by the start time domain unit is the start time of the mth first timer.
The information of the start timing of the mth first timer may include information of the start timing of the first timer, which may or may not be information of the start timing of the mth first timer, and the present application is not limited thereto.
Exemplary, if the fourth information includes the frame number SFN of the frame in which the start time domain unit is located start time And the subframe number Q of the starting time domain unit start time The information of the start time of the Mth first timer includes SFN start time And Q start time . Wherein SFN start time A frame number which is the starting time of the Mth first timer; q (Q) start time Is the subframe number of the starting time of the Mth first timer.
Exemplary, if the fourth information includes the frame number SFN of the frame in which the start time domain unit is located start time Subframe number Q of subframe in which the start time domain unit is located start time Time slot number G of starting time domain unit start time The information of the start time of the Mth first timer includes SFN start time 、Q start time G start time . Wherein SFN start time A frame number which is the starting time of the Mth first timer; q (Q) start time A subframe number which is the starting time of the Mth first timer; g start time And the index of the time slot corresponding to the starting time of the Mth first timer in one subframe.
Exemplary, if the fourth information includes the frame number SFN of the frame in which the start time domain unit is located start time And the time slot number A of the initial time domain unit start time Then MthThe information of the starting time of a timer comprises SFN start time A is a start time . Wherein SFN start time A frame number which is the starting time of the Mth first timer; a is that start time And the index of the time slot corresponding to the starting time of the Mth first timer in one system frame.
Exemplary, if the fourth information includes the frame number SFN of the frame in which the start time domain unit is located start time Subframe number Q of subframe in which the start time domain unit is located start time Time slot number G of time slot where initial time domain unit is start time Symbol number B of the starting time domain unit start time The information of the start time of the Mth first timer includes SFN start time 、Q start time 、G start time B, B start time . Wherein SFN start time A frame number which is the starting time of the Mth first timer; q (Q) start time A subframe number which is the starting time of the Mth first timer; g start time An index of a time slot corresponding to the starting time of the Mth first timer in a subframe; b (B) start time Is the symbol number of the starting time of the Mth first timer.
Exemplary, if the fourth information includes the frame number SFN of the frame in which the start time domain unit is located start time Time slot number A of time slot where initial time domain unit is start time Symbol number B of the starting time domain unit start time The information of the start time of the Mth first timer includes SFN start time 、A start time B, B start time . Wherein SFN start time A frame number which is the starting time of the Mth first timer; a is that start time An index of a time slot corresponding to the starting time of the Mth first timer in a system frame; b (B) start time Is the symbol number of the starting time of the Mth first timer.
Optionally, the network device may send the fourth information to the terminal device in the DRX configuration; accordingly, the terminal device may receive a DRX configuration from the network device, the DRX configuration including fourth information. For example, the DRX configuration may include a DRX cycle.
Alternatively, the fourth information may not be included in the DRX configuration. For example, the fourth information is carried in DCI or MAC CE. For example, the terminal device determines the fourth information according to the time of receiving the DCI. For example, the terminal device activates DRX by receiving DCI after receiving the DRX configuration. If the terminal device determines the fourth information according to the time of receiving the DCI; alternatively, if the terminal device activates DRX by receiving DCI after receiving the DRX configuration, the problem of DRX misalignment between the network device and the terminal device (the problem described in fig. 8) may be avoided.
Alternatively, the fourth information may be acquired from the network device by the terminal device, or may be specified by a protocol, or may be stored by the terminal device itself, or may be acquired by another method, which is not limited by the present application.
Alternatively, step 601 in this embodiment may be replaced by the terminal device obtaining the fourth information. For example, the terminal device uses information about the start timing of the first timer determined last time as fourth information. For example, the information about the start timing of the first timer that the terminal device last determined includes SFN 1 And Q 1 The terminal device will SFN 1 Frame number SFN as frame where starting time domain unit is located start time Will Q 1 Subframe number Q as starting time-domain unit start time Further, fourth information is obtained. For example, the information about the start timing of the first timer that the terminal device last determined includes SFN 1 、Q 1 And G 1 The terminal device will SFN 1 Frame number SFN as frame where starting time domain unit is located start time Will Q 1 Subframe number Q as starting time-domain unit start time Will G 1 Time slot number G as starting time-domain unit start time Further, fourth information is obtained. And are not listed here.
Illustratively, the fourth information is protocol-specified, and the terminal device obtains the fourth information based on the protocol.
Illustratively, the fourth information is stored on the storage medium. The terminal device may read the aforementioned fourth information from the storage medium.
Optionally, step 601 in this embodiment may include the terminal device acquiring a plurality of fourth information.
For example, if the terminal device obtains a plurality of fourth information, the terminal device performs step 602 for each fourth information.
Illustratively, the terminal device obtains multiple sets of DRX configurations, each set of DRX configurations including or corresponding to one fourth information. Optionally, the multiple sets of DRX configurations include or correspond to the same DRX cycle. For another example, the terminal device obtains a set of DRX configurations that include or correspond to a plurality of fourth information.
Illustratively, if the DRX cycle is an integer (e.g., 25ms, 50ms, 100 ms), the terminal device obtains a plurality of fourth information. For example, if the DRX cycle is an integer multiple of the XR service cycle, the terminal device obtains a plurality of fourth information. For example, if the DRX cycle is Y times the service cycle, Y is an integer greater than 1, and the terminal device acquires Y fourth information. For example, the DRX period is 50ms, the service period is 50/3ms, the DRX period is 3 times of the service period, and the terminal equipment acquires 3 pieces of fourth information. For example, the first fourth information includes SFN start time =0 and Q start time =0, the second fourth information includes SFN start time =1 and Q start time =6, the third and fourth information includes SFN start time =3 and Q start time For example, the first fourth information includes W start time =0, the second fourth information includes W start time =16, the third and fourth information includes W start time =33.
Optionally, step 601 in this embodiment may include the terminal device determining a plurality of fourth information based on the seventh information.
Optionally, before step 601, the terminal device may further obtain seventh information.
For example, the terminal device determining the plurality of fourth information based on the seventh information may include the terminal device determining the plurality of fourth information based on the seventh information and the DRX cycle/service cycle.
It should be noted that, the explanation related to the seventh information is similar to that of the fourth information, and the fourth information may be replaced by the seventh information for understanding, which is not described herein.
Illustratively, if the DRX cycle is an integer multiple of the XR service cycle, the terminal device determines a plurality of fourth information. For example, if the DRX cycle is Y times the service cycle, Y is an integer greater than 1, the terminal device determines Y fourth information. For example, the DRX period is 50ms, the service period is 50/3ms, the DRX period is 3 times the service period, and the terminal device determines 3 fourth information.
The determining, by the terminal device, the plurality of fourth information based on the seventh information may include any one or more of the following implementations:
in one possible implementation A1, the fourth information and the seventh information satisfy the following relationship:
first number corresponding to fourth information=first number corresponding to seventh information+f [ (T) DRX /Y)×C];
Optionally, if the value of the service period is a first score, Y is a denominator of the first score. Illustratively, the service period is (Z/Y) ms, where Z and Y have only a common divisor of 1, and Z is not equal to 0 and Y is not equal to 0. (Z/Y) is a first fraction, and Y is a denominator of the first fraction.
Alternatively, y=t DRX /service period. Alternatively, T DRX /Y may be replaced with a traffic cycle.
Optionally, Y is a network device configuration terminal device. Or, alternatively, the service period is configured by the network device to the terminal device.
Wherein c=0, 1,2, …, (Y-2), (Y-1). It is understood that the values of the plurality of C correspond to a plurality of fourth information. For example, the DRX period is 50ms, the traffic period is 50/3ms, Y is equal to 3, C= {0,1/3,2/3}. For example, the DRX period is 100ms, the traffic period is 100/9ms, Y is equal to 9, C= {0,1/9,2/9,3/9,4/9,5/9,6/9,7/9,8/9}.
Wherein F [ ] may represent a rounding operation. Illustratively, F [ ] may be a downward rounding operation, e.g., floor () function; or a round-up operation, e.g., ceil () function; it may also be a rounding operation, e.g. round () function.
For example, the DRX period is 50ms, the traffic period is 50/3ms, Y is equal to 3, and the seventh information includes SFN start time =0 and Q start time =0, if a rounding-down operation is adopted, SFN corresponding to the fourth information start time Q corresponding to x 10+ fourth information start time SFN corresponding to the seventh information start time Q corresponding to x 10+ seventh information start time +F[(50/3)×C]A fourth information including SFN start time =0 and Q start time =0, a fourth information includes SFN start time =1 and Q start time =6, a fourth information includes SFN start time =3 and Q start time =3. For example, the DRX period is 50ms, the traffic period is 50/3ms, Y is equal to 3, and the seventh information includes W start time =0, if a rounding-down operation is used, a fourth information includes W start time =0, a fourth information includes W start time =16, a fourth information includes W start time =33。
Alternatively, implementation A1 may be applicable where the DRX cycle is an integer multiple of the traffic cycle. For example, the DRX period is 50ms, and the service period is 50/3m; or, the DRX period is 100ms, and the service period is 100/9ms.
Alternatively, the implementation A1 may be applicable to the case where DRX is an integer, for example, 25ms, 50ms, 100ms, etc.
Optionally, in this implementation A1, in a case where the DRX cycle is an integer multiple of the service cycle, or in a case where the DRX cycle is an integer, a plurality of fourth information may be obtained, which in combination with the implementation in embodiment 1# in step 602 is beneficial to matching the DRX cycle with the service cycle or to matching the DRX with the service, thereby being beneficial to reducing power consumption of the terminal device and/or reducing a delay in receiving data by the terminal device.
In another possible implementation A2, the fourth information and the seventh information satisfy the following relationship:
First number=first number corresponding to fourth informationFirst quantity +F [ (T) corresponding to seven information DRX )×C];
The explanation concerned may refer to the explanation in the implementation A1.
And if the service period is a first fraction, Y is the denominator of the first fraction. Illustratively, the service period is (Z/Y) ms, where Z and Y have only a common divisor of 1, and Z is not equal to 0 and Y is not equal to 0. (Z/Y) is a first fraction, and Y is a denominator of the first fraction.
Wherein c=0, 1,2, …, (Y-2), (Y-1). It is understood that the values of the plurality of C correspond to a plurality of fourth information. Alternatively, implementation A2 may be employed if the DRX cycle is equal to the traffic cycle.
Alternatively, the implementation A2 may be applicable where DRX is a non-integer, e.g., 25/3ms, 50/3ms, 100/9ms, etc.
Optionally, in this implementation A2, multiple fourth information may be obtained in the case that the DRX cycle is a non-integer, which, in combination with the implementation in implementation # 1 in step 602, is beneficial to matching the DRX cycle with the service cycle or to matching the DRX and the service, thereby being beneficial to reducing the power consumption of the terminal device and/or reducing the delay in receiving data by the terminal device.
It should be noted that, for the implementation A1 and the implementation A2, for different fourth information, the terminal device may maintain different DRX, and the terminal device may also maintain the same set of DRX, which is not limited by the present application.
It should be noted that, the start time domain unit indicated by the fourth information may also be understood as a time domain unit for indicating a time domain position where the mth first timer is located or related. For example, if the time domain unit indicated by the fourth information is a subframe, the time domain position where the mth first timer is located or related is measured by taking the subframe as the granularity. For another example, if the time domain unit indicated by the fourth information is a time slot, the time domain position where the mth first timer is located or related is measured by using the time slot as granularity. It should be noted that the fourth information may indicate a start position of the start time domain unit, or may indicate a position within the start time domain unit, which is not limited by the present application.
In step 602, the terminal device determines information of start timing of the P-th first timer based on the fourth information.
Optionally, one possible implementation manner of the terminal device to determine the information of the start time of the P-th first timer based on the fourth information is: the terminal equipment sequentially determines the information of the starting time of the P first timer based on the fourth information.
For example, sequencing may be understood as increasing order of P, or sequencing may be understood as increasing order of J.
The information of the start timing of the P-th first timer may include information of the start timing of the P-related first timer, which may or may not be information of the start timing of the P-th first timer, and the present application is not limited thereto.
Wherein P is an integer of 0 or more. Optionally, P is greater than or equal to M. For example, the P-th first timer may be understood as a certain first timer after the M-th first timer. Alternatively, the start timing of the P-th first timer and the start timing of the M-th first timer may differ by at least one DRX cycle. Optionally, when the DRX cycle is different, the start timing of the mth first timer is the start timing of the nearest first timer after the start timing of the P-th first timer.
It should be noted that, the value range of P may not be a continuous integer, for example, P may be 0, 3, 6, 9, etc., but 1, 2, 4, 5, 7, 8, etc.; alternatively, the value range of P may be a continuous integer, for example, 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, etc., and the present application is not limited thereto.
One possible implementation, p=p or J. J comprises an integer greater than or equal to 0.
For example, in case that the DRX cycle is an integer multiple (e.g., Y times) of the traffic cycle, or in case that the DRX cycle is an integer, the terminal device determines Y fourth information for which the terminal device can maintain Y sets of DRX. For example, the DRX period is50ms, a service period of 50/3ms, y equal to 3, c=0, 1,2, and seventh information including SFN start time =0 and Q start time =0, if a rounding-down operation is adopted, SFN corresponding to the fourth information start time Q corresponding to x 10+ fourth information start time SFN corresponding to the seventh information start time Q corresponding to x 10+ seventh information start time +F[(50/3)×C]When c=0, a fourth information includes SFN start time =0 and Q start time When=0 and c=1, a fourth information includes SFN start time =1 and Q start time When=6, c=2, a fourth information includes SFN start time =3 and Q start time =3. The terminal device determines information of the start timing of the p=j (e.g., 0,1,2, 3, 4, 5, etc.) th first timer based on the fourth information of c=0. The terminal device determines information of the start timing of the p=j (e.g., 0,1,2, 3, 4, 5, etc.) th first timer based on the fourth information of c=1. The terminal device determines information of the start timing of the p=j (e.g., 0,1,2, 3, 4, 5, etc.) th first timer based on the fourth information of c=2.
Another possible implementation, p=c+y×j.
For example, in case the DRX cycle is an integer multiple (e.g., Y times) of the traffic cycle, or in case the DRX cycle is an integer, the terminal device determines Y fourth information for which the terminal device can maintain the same set of DRX. For example, the DRX period is 50ms, the traffic period is 50/3ms, Y is equal to 3, C=0, 1,2, and the seventh information includes SFN start time =0 and Q start time =0, if a rounding-down operation is adopted, SFN corresponding to the fourth information start time Q corresponding to x 10+ fourth information start time SFN corresponding to the seventh information start time Q corresponding to x 10+ seventh information start time +F[(50/3)×C]When c=0, a fourth information includes SFN start time =0 and Q start time When=0 and c=1, a fourth information includes SFN start time =1 and Q start time When=6, c=2, a fourth information includes SFN start time =3 and Q start time =3. The terminal device determines information of the start timing of the p=0+3×j (e.g., 0, 3, 6, 9, etc.) th first timer based on the fourth information of c=0. The terminal device determines information of the start timing of the p=1+3×j (e.g., 1, 4, 7, 10, etc.) th first timer based on the fourth information of c=1. The terminal device determines information of the start timing of the p=2+3×j (e.g., 2, 5, 8, 11, etc.) th first timer based on the fourth information of c=2. It is to be understood that the information of the start timings of the plurality of first timers determined based on the plurality of fourth information is combined, p=0, 1,2, 3, 4, 5, and the like.
Another possible implementation, p=y×j.
For example, in case that the DRX cycle is an integer multiple (e.g., Y times) of the traffic cycle or the DRX cycle is equal to the traffic cycle or the DRX cycle is an integer, or in case that the DRX cycle is an integer, the terminal device determines 1 fourth information for which the terminal device can maintain a set of DRX. For example, the DRX period is 50ms, the traffic period is 50/3ms, Y is equal to 3, and the fourth information includes SFN start time =0 and Q start time The terminal apparatus determines information of the start timing of the p=3×j (e.g., 0, 3, 6, 9, etc.) first timers based on the fourth information.
For example, the granularity of the time domain unit corresponding to the start time of the P first timer is the same as the granularity of the time domain unit corresponding to the start time of the M first timer.
For example, if the start timing of the mth first timer is a certain subframe, the start timing of the P first timer is also a certain subframe. It may also be understood that, if the information of the start timing of the mth first timer includes a frame number and a subframe number, the information of the start timing of the P first timer also includes a frame number and a subframe number.
For example, if the start timing of the mth first timer is a certain subframe, the start timing of the mth first timer may be a start position of a certain subframe, or may be a certain time domain position inside a certain subframe. For example, if the Mth first timer The information of the start time includes frame number, subframe number and R start time The information of the start timing of the P-th first timer also includes a frame number, a subframe number, and R.
For example, if the start timing of the mth first timer is a certain time slot, the start timing of the P first timer is also a certain time slot. It may also be understood that, if the information of the start timing of the mth first timer includes a frame number, a subframe number, and a slot number, the information of the start timing of the P first timer also includes a frame number, a subframe number, and a slot number.
For example, if the start timing of the mth first timer is a certain time slot, the start timing of the P first timer may be the start position of a certain time slot or a certain time domain position inside a certain time slot. For example, if the information of the start timing of the Mth first timer includes a frame number, a slot number and R start time The information of the start timing of the P-th first timer also includes a frame number, a slot number, and R. For another example, if the information of the start timing of the mth first timer includes a frame number, a subframe number, a slot number, and R start time The information of the start timing of the P-th first timer also includes a frame number, a subframe number, a slot number, and R.
For example, if the start timing of the mth first timer is a certain symbol, the start timing of the P first timer is also a certain symbol. It may also be understood that, if the information of the start timing of the mth first timer includes a frame number, a subframe number, a slot number, and a symbol number, the information of the start timing of the P first timer also includes a frame number, a subframe number, a slot number, and a symbol number.
For example, if the start timing of the mth first timer is a certain symbol, the start timing of the P first timer may be a start position of a certain symbol or a certain time domain position inside a certain symbol. For example, if the information of the start timing of the Mth first timer includes frame number, slot number, symbol number and R start time The information of the start timing of the P-th first timer also includes the frame numberA slot number, a symbol number, and R. For another example, if the information of the start timing of the mth first timer includes a frame number, a subframe number, a slot number, a symbol number, and R start time The information of the start timing of the P-th first timer also includes a frame number, a subframe number, a slot number, a symbol number, and R.
Optionally, the terminal device determines information of a start timing of the P-th first timer based on the fourth information and the DRX cycle. Optionally, the terminal device determines the information of the start time of the P-th first timer based on the fourth information and the first period. Wherein the first period is equal to the cumulative sum of the N DRX cycles. One possible implementation, N is equal to (P-M) or P. Another possible implementation, N is equal to (P/Y) -M, or P/Y. In another possible implementation, N is equal to [ (P-C)/Y ] -M or (P-C)/Y. For example, N is greater than or equal to 0.
In one possible implementation manner, as shown in fig. 7, the terminal device determines the start timing of the P-th first timer according to the following condition:
the remainder of dividing the sum of the first number and the cumulative sum of (P-M) DRX cycles by the second number is equal to the third number; or alternatively;
third number = (first number + ((cumulative sum of P-M DRX cycles)) mod second number.
In the present application, (P-M) DRX cycles may be replaced with N DRX cycles.
In another possible implementation, (P-M) DRX cycles may be replaced with N DRX cycles.
Optionally, the first number is the number of time domain units between the start position of the superframe where the mth first timer is located and the start time of the mth first timer.
Exemplary, if the fourth information includes SFN start time And Q start time The first number may be (SFN start time ×10+Q start time ) The number of subframes between the start position of the superframe where the mth first timer is located and the start timing of the mth first timer is indicated.
Exemplary, if the fourth information includes SFN start time 、Q start time And G start time The first number may be Indicating the number of slots between the start position of the superframe where the mth first timer is located and the start timing of the mth first timer.
Exemplary, if the fourth information includes SFN start time 、Q start time 、G start time And B start time The first number may beThe number of symbols between the start position of the superframe where the mth first timer is located and the start timing of the mth first timer is indicated.
Exemplary, if the fourth information includes SFN start time And A start time The first number may be Indicating the number of slots between the start position of the superframe where the mth first timer is located and the start timing of the mth first timer.
Exemplary, if the fourth information includes SFN start time 、A start time And B start time The first number may be The number of symbols between the start position of the superframe where the mth first timer is located and the start timing of the mth first timer is indicated.
Where 10 denotes the number of subframes that one system frame contains.Is the number of slots that a subframe contains.Is the number of slots that a system frame contains. H is the number of symbols contained in one slot. For example, H is equal to 12 or 14.
Alternatively, the cumulative sum of the (P-M) DRX cycles may be expressed as NxT DRX Wherein n= (P-M). Alternatively, when m=0, n=p. T (T) DRX Representing the duration of one DRX cycle. Alternatively, the DRX cycle is a long DRX cycle (DRX-LongCycle).
Optionally, the second number is a number of time domain units contained in one superframe.
Exemplary, if the fourth information includes SFN start time And Q start time The second number is represented by the number of subframes. For example, the second number may be (d×10), i.e., one superframe contains (d×10) subframes.
Exemplary, if the fourth information includes SFN start time 、Q start time And G start time The second number is represented by the number of time slots. For example, the second number may beI.e. contained within a superframeAnd each time slot.
Exemplary, if the fourth information includes SFN start time And A start time The second number is represented by the number of time slots. For example, the second number may beI.e. one superframe contains +>And each time slot. />
Exemplary, if the fourth information includes SFN start time 、Q start time 、G start time And B start time The second number is represented by the number of symbols. For example, the second number may beI.e. contained within a superframe And a symbol.
Exemplary, if the fourth information includes SFN start time 、A start time And B start time The second number is represented by the number of symbols. For example, the second number may beI.e. contained within a superframeAnd a symbol.
Wherein D is the number of frames contained in one superframe; 10 denotes the number of subframes that one system frame contains;is the number of slots contained in one subframe; / >Is the number of time slots contained in one system frame; h is the number of symbols contained in one slot. For example, h=14 or h=12.
Optionally, the third number is the number of time domain units between the start position of the superframe where the P first timer is located and the start time of the P first timer.
Exemplary, if the fourth information includes SFN start time And Q start time The third number is represented by the number of subframes. For example, the third quantity may be [ (SFN x 10) +Q]。
Exemplary, if the fourth information includes SFN start time 、Q start time And G start time The third number is represented by the number of time slots. For example, the third number may be
Exemplary, if the fourth information includes SFN start time 、Q start time And A start time The third number is represented by the number of time slots. For example, the third number may be
Exemplary, if the fourth information includes SFN start time 、Q start time 、G start time And B start time The third number is represented by the number of symbols. For example, the third number may be
Exemplary, if the fourth information includes SFN start time 、A start time And B start time The third number is represented by the number of symbols. For example, the third number may be
The SFN is the frame number of the starting time of the P first timer; q is the subframe number of the starting time of the P first timer; 10 denotes the number of subframes that one system frame contains; Is one ofThe number of slots contained in a subframe.The number of slots contained for a system frame; h is the number of symbols contained in one slot. For example, H is equal to 12 or 14.
For example, the process of determining the information related to the start timing of the P-th first timer by the terminal device based on the fourth information and the accumulated sum of the (P-M) DRX cycles may specifically be: (1) determining a first number based on the fourth information; (2) Determining a remainder of dividing a sum of the first number and a cumulative sum of (P-M) DRX cycles by the second number to obtain a third number; (3) The start time related information of the first timer in the P-th DRX cycle is determined based on the third number.
It should be understood that when the granularity of the time domain units indicated by the fourth information is different, the formula used when the terminal device calculates the start opportunity of the first timer is different. The following description will be made respectively:
in one class of embodiment 1# the following implementations are included:
in a possible embodiment, when the fourth information includes a frame number SFN of the frame in which the start time domain unit is located start time And the subframe number Q of the starting time domain unit start time And the terminal equipment determines the information of the starting time of the P first timer based on the fourth information, and satisfies the following formula 3.1:
[(SFN×10)+Q]=[(SFN start time ×10+Q start time )+N×T DRX ]mod (d×10); (equation 3.1)
The SFN is the frame number of the starting time of the P first timer. Q is the subframe number of the starting time of the P first timer. SFN (SFN) start time Is the frame number of the starting time of the Mth first timer. Q (Q) start time Is the subframe number of the starting time of the Mth first timer. (N X T) DRX ) The first period is a unit of a subframe. T (T) DRX Representing the duration of one DRX cycle. Alternatively, the DRX cycle is a long DRX cycle (DRX-LongCycle). D is the number of frames that a superframe contains. Illustratively, d=1024,meaning that one superframe includes 1024 frames.
In another possible embodiment, when the fourth information includes a frame number SFN of the frame in which the start time domain unit is located start time Subframe number Q of subframe in which the start time domain unit is located start time Time slot number G of starting time domain unit start time And the terminal equipment determines the information of the starting time of the P first timer based on the fourth information, and satisfies the following formula 3.2:
the SFN is the frame number of the starting time of the P first timer. Q is the subframe number of the starting time of the P first timer. G is the index of the time slot corresponding to the starting time of the P first timer in one subframe. SFN (SFN) start time Is the frame number of the starting time of the Mth first timer. Q (Q) start time Is the subframe number of the starting time of the Mth first timer. G start time And the index of the time slot corresponding to the starting time of the Mth first timer in one subframe.Is the number of slots contained in one subframe. (N X T) DRX ) The first period is a unit of a subframe. T (T) DRX Representing the duration of one DRX cycle. Alternatively, the DRX cycle is a long DRX cycle (DRX-LongCycle). D is the number of frames that a superframe contains. Illustratively, d=1024, meaning that one superframe includes 1024 frames.
In another possible embodiment, when the fourth information includes a frame number SFN of the frame in which the start time domain unit is located start time And the time slot number A of the initial time domain unit start time And the terminal equipment determines the information of the starting time of the P first timer based on the fourth information, and satisfies the following formula 3.3:
the SFN is the frame number of the starting time of the P first timer. A is the index of the time slot corresponding to the starting time of the P first timer in a system frame. SFN (SFN) start time Is the frame number of the starting time of the Mth first timer. A is that start time And the index of the time slot corresponding to the starting time of the Mth first timer in one system frame.Is the number of slots contained in one frame. (N X T) DRX ) The first period is a unit of a subframe. T (T) DRX Representing the duration of one DRX cycle. Alternatively, the DRX cycle is a long DRX cycle (DRX-LongCycle). D is the number of frames that a superframe contains. Illustratively, d=1024, meaning that one superframe includes 1024 frames.
In another possible embodiment, when the fourth information includes a frame number SFN of the frame in which the start time domain unit is located start time Subframe number Q of subframe in which the start time domain unit is located start time Time slot number G of time slot where initial time domain unit is start time Symbol number B of the starting time domain unit start time And the terminal equipment determines the information of the starting time of the P first timer based on the fourth information, and satisfies the following formula 3.4:
the SFN is the frame number of the starting time of the P first timer. Q is the subframe number of the starting time of the P first timer. G is the index of the time slot corresponding to the starting time of the P first timer in one subframe. B is the symbol number of the starting time of the P first timer. SFN (SFN) start time Is the frame number of the starting time of the Mth first timer. Q (Q) start time Is the subframe number of the starting time of the Mth first timer. G start time Pairs of start timings for the mth first timerIndex of the corresponding slot in one subframe. B (B) start time Is the symbol number of the starting time of the Mth first timer.Is the number of slots contained in one subframe. (N X T) DRX ) The first period is a unit of a subframe. T (T) DRX Representing the duration of one DRX cycle. Alternatively, the DRX cycle is a long DRX cycle (DRX-LongCycle). D is the number of frames that a superframe contains. Illustratively, d=1024, meaning that one superframe includes 1024 frames. H is the number of symbols contained in one slot. Illustratively, h=14, meaning that one slot includes 14 symbols. Illustratively, h=12, meaning that one slot includes 12 symbols.
In another possible embodiment, when the fourth information includes a frame number SFN of the frame in which the start time domain unit is located start time Time slot number A of time slot where initial time domain unit is start time And the symbol number (or index of the symbol) B of the starting time-domain unit start time And the terminal equipment determines the information of the starting time of the P first timer based on the fourth information, and satisfies the following formula 3.5:
the SFN is the frame number of the starting time of the P first timer. Q is the subframe number of the starting time of the P first timer. A is the index of the time slot corresponding to the starting time of the P first timer in a system frame. B is the symbol number of the starting time of the P first timer. SFN (SFN) start time Is the frame number of the starting time of the Mth first timer. Q (Q) start time Is the subframe number of the starting time of the Mth first timer. A is that start time And the index of the time slot corresponding to the starting time of the Mth first timer in one system frame. B (B) start time Is the symbol number of the starting time of the Mth first timer.Is the number of slots contained in one frame. (N X T) DRX ) The first period is a unit of a subframe. T (T) DRX Representing the duration of one DRX cycle. D is the number of frames that a superframe contains. Illustratively, d=1024, meaning that one superframe includes 1024 frames. H is the number of symbols contained in one slot. Illustratively, h=14, meaning that one slot includes 14 symbols. Illustratively, h=12, meaning that one slot includes 12 symbols.
Optionally, when the value of the DRX cycle is an integer, the terminal device may determine the information of the start timing of the P-th first timer by using any one of the foregoing formulas 3.1, 3.2, 3.3, 3.4, and 3.5 based on the fourth information.
Note that, if the DRX cycle is a non-integer (e.g., 25/3ms, 50/3ms, 100/9ms, etc.), if N is equal to some value (e.g., 1, 2, 4, 5, etc.), the right of the equal sign is a non-integer, and the left of the equal sign can only be an integer, so that the information about the start timing of the P-th first timer cannot be determined. This can be solved by the following embodiments:
In another class of embodiment 2# the following implementations are included:
in one possible implementation, when the fourth information includes an SFN start time And Q start time The terminal device uses the following formula 3.6:
[(SFN×10)+Q]=F{[(SFN start time ×10+Q start time )+N×T DRX ]mod (1024×10) }; (equation 3.6)
In another possible embodiment, when the fourth information includes an SFN start time 、Q start time G start time When the terminal device uses the following formula 3.7:
in another kind ofIn an alternative embodiment, when the fourth information includes an SFN start time And A start time When the terminal device uses the following formula 3.8:
in another possible embodiment, when the fourth information includes an SFN start time 、Q start time 、G start time B, B start time The terminal device uses the following formula 3.9:
in another possible embodiment, when the fourth information includes an SFN start time 、A start time B, B start time When the terminal device uses the following formula 3.10:
in another class of embodiment 3# the following implementations are included:
in one possible implementation, when the fourth information includes an SFN start time And Q start time When the terminal device uses the following formula 3.11:
[(SFN×10)+Q]=F{[(SFN start time ×10+Q start time )+N×T DRX ]mod (1024 x 10); or [ (SFN x 10) +Q]=[(SFN start time ×10+Q start time )+F(N×T DRX )]mod (1024×10); (equation 3.11)
In another possible embodiment, when the fourth information includes an SFN start time 、Q start time G start time When the terminal is set upThe following equation 3.12 is used:
in another possible embodiment, when the fourth information includes an SFN start time And A start time When the terminal device uses the following formula 3.13:
in another possible embodiment, when the fourth information includes an SFN start time 、Q start time 、G start time B, B start time The terminal device uses the following equation 3.14:
in another possible embodiment, when the fourth information includes an SFN start time 、A start time B, B start time When the terminal device uses the following formula 3.15:
optionally, if the DRX cycle is a non-integer, the terminal device may determine, based on the fourth information, information of the start timing of the P-th first timer by using any one of the foregoing formulas 3.6, 3.7, 3.8, 3.9, 3.10, 3.11, 3.12, 3.13, 3.14, and 3.15.
In equations 3.6 to 3.15, F { } may represent a rounding operation. Illustratively, F { } may be a downward rounding operation, e.g., floor () function; or a round-up operation, e.g., ceil () function; it may also be a rounding operation, e.g. round () function. The meaning of the remaining parameters is referred to the corresponding related descriptions of formulas 3.1 to 3.5, and will not be repeated here.
In the formulas 3.6 to 3.10, when T DRX When the value of (2) is a non-integer, N×T DRX May be a non-integer. Because of the modulo operation, the right value of the equation is an integer, so that the right value of the equation is an integer, and the terminal equipment can calculate the information of the start time of the P first timer.
Illustratively, taking equation 3.6 as an example, the values on both sides of the equal sign represent the number of subframes. Wherein [ (SFN x 10) +Q]The value of (2) indicates the number of subframes between the start position of the superframe where the P-th first timer is located and the start timing of the P-th first timer; (SFN) start time ×10+Q start time ) The value of (2) represents the number of subframes between the start position of the superframe where the mth first timer is located and the start timing of the mth first timer; N×T DRX The number of subframes included in N DRX cycles indicating an interval between the start timing of the mth first timer and the start timing of the P first timer. Wherein T is DRX In milliseconds (ms), since the duration of one subframe is 1ms, T DRX It can also be understood as the number of subframes that one DRX cycle contains. Taking DRX period of (25/3) ms as an example, T DRX = (25/3) ms, which means that one DRX cycle includes (25/3) subframes, and means that the duration of one DRX cycle is equal to (1/3) of the duration corresponding to 8 subframes plus the duration of one subframe, i.e., 8.3333ms. Para { [ (SFN) start time ×10+Q start time )+N×T DRX ]The calculation result of mod (1024×10) } after the rounding operation indicates how many subframes. For example, SFN start time =0,Q start time =1,N=1,T DRX = (25/3) subframes, then [ (SFN) start time ×10+Q start time )+N×T DRX ]mod(1024×10)=[1+1×(25/3)]mod (1024×10) = (28/3) subframes. If F is floor () function, F { [ (SFN) start time ×10+Q start time )+N×T DRX ]mod(1024×10)}=floor{[1+1×(25/3)]mod (1024×10) } =floor (28/3) =9 subframes, bringing into equation 3.6 yields:[(SFN×10)+Q]=9 subframes, and sfn=0, q=9 can be obtained. If F is the ceil () function, F { [ (SFN) start time ×10+Q start time )+N×T DRX ]mod(1024×10)}=ceil{[1+1×(25/3)]mod (1024×10) } = ceil (28/3) = 10 subframes, bringing into equation 3.6 yields: [ (SFN×10) +Q]=10 subframes, and sfn=1, q=0 can be obtained.
It should be noted that the description related in units of ms or milliseconds can be understood as follows: the unit is a subframe.
Illustratively, taking equation 3.7 as an example, the values on both sides of the equal sign represent the number of slots. Wherein, the value of (2) indicates the number of slots between the start position of the superframe where the P-th first timer is located and the start timing of the P-th first timer;The value of (2) represents the number of slots between the start position of the superframe where the mth first timer is located and the start timing of the mth first timer;the number of slots included in the N DRX cycles indicating the interval between the start timing of the mth first timer and the start timing of the P first timer. Taking DRX cycle of (25/3) ms as an example, if the subcarrier spacing is 30kHz, one subframe contains 2 time slots, and the duration of one time slot is 0.5ms, T is DRX =(25/3)ms=(50/3)×0.5ms,Indicating that one DRX cycle contains (50/3) time slots, indicating that the duration of one DRX cycle is equal to the duration corresponding to 16 time slots plus (2/3) of the duration of one time slot. For the formula- > The calculation result after the rounding operation indicates how many slots. For example, SFN start time =0,Q start time =1,G start time =1,N=1, T DRX = (25/3) ms, then And each time slot. If F is floor () function, then The number of slots, brought into equation 3.7, is available: Sfn=0, q= 9,G =1 can be obtained in turn for each slot. If F is the ceil () function, +.> The number of slots, brought into equation 3.7, is available: Sfn=1, q= 0,G =0 can be obtained in turn for each slot.
Illustratively, taking equation 3.9 as an example, the values on both sides of the equal sign represent the number of symbols. Wherein, the value of (2) represents the number of symbols between the start position of the superframe where the P-th first timer is located and the start timing of the P-th first timer; the value of (2) represents the number of symbols between the start position of the superframe where the mth first timer is located and the start timing of the mth first timer;the number of symbols included in N DRX cycles indicating an interval between the start timing of the mth first timer and the start timing of the P first timer. Taking the DRX cycle of (25/3) ms as an example, if the subcarrier spacing is 30kHz, one subframe contains 2 slots, one slot has a duration of 0.5ms, and one slot contains 14 symbols (i.e., h=14), then T DRX = (25/3) ms= (50/3) ×0.5 ms= (700/3) ×0.5× (1/14) ms, indicating that the duration of one DRX cycle is equal to the duration corresponding to 233 symbols plus (1/3) of the duration of one symbol. Paired son The calculation result after the rounding operation represents how manyThe symbols. For example, SFN start time =0,Q start time =1,G start time =1,B start time =1,H=14,N=1,T DRX = (25/3) ms, then And a symbol. If F is floor () function, +.> The number of symbols, brought into equation 3.9, can be obtained: The symbols, in turn, can yield sfn=0, q= 9,G =1, b=10. If F is the ceil () function, +.> The number of symbols, brought into equation 3.9, can be obtained:the number of symbols, and hence sfn=0, q= 9,G =1,B=11。
in the formulas 3.11 to 3.15, when T DRX When the value of (2) is a non-integer, N×T DRX May be a non-integer. The right side of the equation is an integer due to the modulo operation, so that the right side of the equation is an integer, and the terminal equipment can calculate the information of the starting time of the P first timer.
Illustratively, taking equation 3.11 as an example, the values on both sides of the equal sign represent the number of subframes. Wherein [ (SFN x 10) +Q],(SFN start time ×10+Q start time ),T DRX And, N x T DRX The meaning of (2) is the same as that of the related formula in formula 3.6. Taking DRX period of (25/3) ms as an example, T DRX = (25/3) ms. Para { [ (SFN) start time ×10+Q start time )+N×T DRX ]The calculation result after rounding operation indicates how many subframes. For example, SFN start time =0,Q start time =1,N=1,T DRX = (25/3) subframes, then [ (SFN) start time ×10+Q start time )+N×T DRX ]=[1+1×(25/3)]= (28/3) subframes. If F is floor () function, F { [ (SFN) start time ×10+Q start time )+N×T DRX ]}mod(1024×10)=floor[1+1×(25/3)]mod (1024×10) =floor (28/3) mod (1024×10) =9 subframes, bringing into equation 3.11 yields: [ (SFN×10) +Q ]=9 subframes, and sfn=0, q=9 can be obtained. If F is the ceil () function, F [ (SFN) start time ×10+Q start time )+N×T DRX ]mod(1024×10)=ceil[1+1×(25/3)]mod (1024×10) =ceil (28/3) mod (1024×10) =10 subframes, bringing into equation 3.11 yields: [ (SFN×10) +Q]=10 subframes, and sfn=1, q=0 can be obtained.
Illustratively, taking equation 3.12 as an example, the values on both sides of the equal sign represent the number of slots. Wherein, T DRX and (2) a-> The meaning of (2) is the same as that of the related formula in formula 3.7. Taking DRX cycle of (25/3) ms as an example, if the subcarrier spacing is 30kHz, one subframe contains 2 time slots, and the duration of one time slot is 0.5ms, T is DRX =(25/3)ms=(50/3)×0.5ms,Indicating that one DRX cycle contains (50/3) time slots, indicating that the duration of one DRX cycle is equal to the duration corresponding to 16 time slots plus (2/3) of the duration of one time slot. Paired sonThe calculation result after the rounding operation indicates how many slots. For example, SFN start time =0,Q start time =1,G start time =1,N=1,T DRX = (25/3) ms, then And each time slot. If F is floor () function, then The number of slots, brought into equation 3.12, is available: Sfn=0, q= 9,G =1 can be obtained in turn for each slot. If F is the ceil () function, +.> The number of slots, brought into equation 3.12, is available: Sfn=1, q= 0,G =0 can be obtained in turn for each slot.
Illustratively, taking equation 3.14 as an example, the values on both sides of the equal sign represent the number of symbols. Wherein, T DRX And->The meaning of (2) is the same as that of the related formula in formula 3.9. Taking the DRX cycle of (25/3) ms as an example, if the subcarrier spacing is 30kHz, one subframe contains 2 slots, and one slot contains 14 symbols (i.e., h=14), then T DRX = (25/3) m, which means that the duration of the DRX cycle is equal to 233 symbols of the corresponding duration plus (1/3) of the duration of one symbol. For the formula-> The result of the rounding operation represents how many symbols. For example, SFN start time =0,Q start time =1,G start time =1,B start time =1,H=14,N=1,T DRX = (25/3) ms, then And a symbol. If F is floor () function, then The number of symbols, brought into equation 3.14, can be obtained: The symbols, in turn, can yield sfn=0, q= 9,G =1, b=10. If F is the ceil () function, then Each symbol isIt is available to bring formula 3.14: The symbols, in turn, can yield sfn=0, q= 9,G =1, b=11.
And so on, the terminal device can calculate the information related to the start time of the first timer based on any one of the formulas 3.6 to 3.15 based on the fourth information. The application is not illustrated.
It should be understood that, when the DRX cycle is an integer, the terminal device may also determine the information of the start timing of the P-th first timer using equations 3.6 to 3.15. In this case, the values before and after the rounding operation are integers, and the values in the formula are not affected.
In addition, when the DRX cycle is a non-integer, the terminal device may determine the information of the start timing of the P-th first timer according to any one of the following formulas 3.16, 3.17, 3.18, 3.19, and 3.20 based on the fourth information.
In another class of embodiment 4# the following implementations are included:
in one possible implementation, when the fourth information includes an SFN start time 、Q start time And R is start time The terminal device uses the following equation 3.16:
[(SFN×10)+Q+R]=[(SFN start time ×10+Q start time +R start time )+N×T DRX ]mod (1024×10); (equation 3.16)
Exemplary, R start time Greater than or equal to 0 and less than 1. Illustratively, R is greater than or equal to 0 and less than 1. Exemplary, R start time In ms or subframes or number of subframes, or R start time There are no units. Illustratively, the unit of R is ms or the number of subframes or subframes, or R is no unit. Optionally, R is smaller than one corresponding to the start time of the P-th first timerAnd the duration corresponding to the sub-frames. Alternatively, R start time And the starting time of the Mth first timer is less than the duration corresponding to one subframe. Illustratively, R is used to indicate the start timing of the P first timer or the offset of the information of the start timing of the P first timer within one subframe. Exemplary, R start time The information indicating the start timing of the mth first timer or the start timing of the mth first timer is offset within one subframe.
In another possible embodiment, when the fourth information includes an SFN start time 、Q start time 、G start time R is as follows start time The terminal device uses the following equation 3.17:
exemplary, R start time Greater than or equal to 0 and less than 1. Illustratively, R is greater than or equal to 0 and less than 1. Exemplary, R start time In terms of time slots or number of time slots, or R start time There are no units. Illustratively, the unit of R is the time slot or the number of time slots, or R is no unit. Alternatively, R X T slot The starting time of the P first timer is related to a time length which is smaller than the time slot corresponding to the time slot. Alternatively, R start time ×T slot The starting time of the Mth first timer is related to a time length which is smaller than the time slot corresponding to the time slot. Illustratively, R is used to indicate the start timing of the P first timer or the offset of the information of the start timing of the P first timer in one slot is a proportion of one slot. Exemplary, R start time The offset of the information indicating the start timing of the mth first timer or the start timing of the mth first timer in one slot is a proportion of one slot. Wherein T is slot Is the duration corresponding to one time slot.
In another possible embodiment, when the fourth information includes an SFN start time 、A start time And R is start time The terminal device uses the following equation 3.18:
R start time the content related to R is shown in equation 3.17, and will not be described here.
In another possible embodiment, when the fourth information includes an SFN start time 、Q start time 、G start time 、B start time R is as follows start time The terminal device uses the following equation 3.19:
exemplary, R start time Greater than or equal to 1 and less than 1. Illustratively, R is greater than or equal to 1 and less than 1. Exemplary, R start time In units of symbols or number of symbols, or R start time There are no units. Illustratively, the units of R are symbols or numbers of symbols, or R is no unit. Alternatively, R X T symbol The starting time of the P first timer is related to a duration which is smaller than the duration corresponding to one symbol. Alternatively, R start time ×T symbol The starting time of the Mth first timer is related to a duration which is smaller than the duration corresponding to one symbol. Illustratively, R is used to indicate the start timing of the P first timer or the offset of the information of the start timing of the P first timer in one symbol is a proportion of one symbol. Exemplary, R start time The offset of the information indicating the start timing of the mth first timer or the start timing of the mth first timer in one symbol is a proportion of one symbol.
In another possible embodiment, when the fourth information includes an SFN start time 、A start time 、B start time R is as follows start time The terminal device uses the following equation 3.20:
R start time the content related to R is shown in equation 3.19, and will not be described here.
In the formulas 3.16 to 3.20, R is greater than or equal to 0 and less than 1, R is start time The value of (2) is greater than or equal to 0 and less than 1. The meaning of the remaining parameters is referred to the corresponding related descriptions of formulas 3.1 to 3.5, and will not be repeated here.
Optionally, when the start timing of the mth first timer is located at the start position of the time domain unit, R start time The value of (2) may be 0. For example, in equation 3.16, R start time =0 indicates that the start timing of the mth first timer is at Q start time The start position of the indicated subframe. Also for example, in equation 3.17, R start time =0 indicates that the start timing of the mth first timer is at G start time The start position of the indicated slot. Also for example, in equation 3.19, R start time =0 indicates that the start timing of the mth first timer is at B start time The starting position of the indicated symbol.
Illustratively, taking equation 3.16 as an example, the values on both sides of the equal sign represent the number of subframes. [ (SFN×10) +Q+R]The value of (2) indicates the number of subframes between the start position of the superframe where the P-th first timer is located and the start timing of the P-th first timer. Wherein (((SFN x 10) +Q) represents an integer part of the number of subframes; r represents a fractional part of the number of subframes or is understood to be less than the duration of one subframe. (SFN) start time ×10+Q start time +R start time ) The value of (2) indicates the number of subframes between the start position of the superframe where the mth first timer is located and the start timing of the mth first timer. Wherein (((SFN) start time ×10)+Q start time ) An integer part representing the number of subframes; r is R start time A fractional part representing the number of subframes, or understood to be less than one subframeThe duration of the frame. N×T DRX The number of subframes included in N DRX cycles indicating an interval between the start timing of the mth first timer and the start timing of the P first timer. Wherein T is DRX In milliseconds (ms), since the duration of one subframe is 1ms, T DRX It can also be understood as the number of subframes that one DRX cycle contains. Taking DRX period of (25/3) ms as an example, T DRX = (25/3) ms, which means that one DRX cycle includes (25/3) subframes, the duration of the DRX cycle is equal to (1/3) of the duration corresponding to 8 subframes plus the duration of one subframe, i.e., 8.3333ms. For example, SFN start time =0,Q start time =1,R start time =0,N=1,T DRX = (25/3) ms, then [ (SFN) start time ×10+Q start time +R start time )+N×T DRX ]mod(1024×10)=[1+1×(25/3)]mod (1024×10) = (28/3) subframes. The substitution into equation 3.16 yields: [ (SFN×10) +Q+R]= (28/3) subframes, and further sfn=0, q= 9,R = (1/3) can be obtained.
Illustratively, taking equation 3.17 as an example, the values on both sides of the equal sign represent the number of slots. The value of (2) indicates the number of slots between the start position of the superframe where the P-th first timer is located and the start timing of the P-th first timer. Wherein (1) >An integer part representing the number of the slots; r represents the fractional part of the number of slots. The value of (2) represents the starting position of the superframe where the Mth first timer is located to the Mth first timerThe number of time slots between the start occasions of the timer. Wherein (1)>An integer part representing the number of the slots; r is R start time Representing the fractional part of the number of slots.The number of slots included in the N DRX cycles indicating the interval between the start timing of the mth first timer and the start timing of the P first timer. Taking DRX cycle of (25/3) ms as an example, if the subcarrier spacing is 30kHz and one subframe contains 2 time slots, T is DRX =(25/3)ms=(50/3)×0.5ms,Indicating that one DRX cycle contains (50/3) time slots, indicating that the duration of the DRX cycle is equal to the duration corresponding to 16 time slots plus (2/3) of the duration of one time slot. For example, SFN start time =0,Q start time =1,G start time =1,R start time =0,N=1,T DRX = (25/3) ms, then And each time slot. The substitution of equation 3.17 yields:Sfn=0, q= 9,G =1, r= (1/3) can be obtained in turn for each slot.
And so on, the terminal device can calculate the information related to the start timing of the first timer based on any one of the formulas 3.16 to 3.20 based on the fourth information. The application is not illustrated.
In another class of embodiment 5#, the fourth information received by the terminal device may not include R start time . The method specifically comprises the following implementation modes:
in one possible implementation, when the fourth information includes an SFN start time And Q start time When the terminal device uses the following formula 3.21:
[(SFN×10)+Q+R]=[(SFN start time ×10+Q start time )+N×T DRX ]mod (1024×10); (equation 3.21)
R start time The content related to R is shown in formula 3.16, and will not be described here.
In another possible embodiment, when the fourth information includes an SFN start time 、Q start time And G start time The terminal device uses the following equation 3.22:
R start time the content related to R is shown in equation 3.17, and will not be described here.
In another possible embodiment, when the fourth information includes an SFN start time And A start time When the terminal device uses the following formula 3.23:
R start time the content related to R is shown in equation 3.17, and will not be described here.
In another possible embodiment, when the fourth information includes an SFN start time 、Q start time 、G start time And B start time In this case, the terminal device uses the following schemeFormula 3.24:
R start time the content related to R is shown in equation 3.19, and will not be described here.
In another possible embodiment, when the fourth information includes an SFN start time 、A start time 、B start time R is as follows start time The terminal device uses the following equation 3.25:
R start time the content related to R is shown in equation 3.19, and will not be described here.
Alternatively, the equations in equations 3.1 to 3.25 for expressing the number of time domain units between the start position of the superframe where the mth first timer is located and the start timing of the mth first timer may be expressed by one parameter. Alternatively, the first quantity in equations 3.1 through 3.25 may be represented by a parameter.
Exemplary, W can be used start time Indicating the number of subframes between the start position of the superframe where the Mth first timer is located and the start time of the Mth first timer, or W may be used start time Representing a first number.
For example, (SFN) in equations 3.1, 3.6, 3.11 and 3.21 start time ×10+Q start time ) Can be replaced by W start time . Alternatively, W start time The value of (2) is an integer. For example, [ (SFN X10) +Q]=[W start time +N×T DRX ]mod (1024×10) (formula 3.1.1). For example, [ (SFN X10) +Q]=F{[W start time +N×T DRX ]mod (1024×10) } (equation 3.6.1). For example, [ (SFN X10) +Q]=F{[W start time +N×T DRX ]Mod (1024X 10) or, [ (SFN X10) +Q]=[W start time +F(N×T DRX )]mod (1024×10) (formula 3.11.1). For example, [ (SFN×10) +Q+R]=[W start time +N×T DRX ]mod (1024×10) (formula 3.21.1). For example, the network device configures only one parameter W when configuring the start opportunity indicating the mth first timer for the terminal device start time Rather than configuring an SFN start time And Q start time These two parameters.
Also for example, (SFN) in equation 3.16 start time ×10+Q start time +R start time ) Can be replaced by W start time . Alternatively, W start time Is a non-integer or integer. For example, [ (SFN×10) +Q+R]=[W start time +N×T DRX ]mod (1024×10) (formula 3.16.1). For example, the network device configures only one parameter W when configuring the start opportunity indicating the mth first timer for the terminal device start time Rather than configuring an SFN start time 、Q start time And R is start time These three parameters.
Exemplary, U can be employed start time Indicating the number of time slots between the start position of the superframe where the Mth first timer is located and the start time of the Mth first timer, or U can be adopted start time Representing a first number.
For example, in equations 3.2, 3.7, 3.12 and 3.22 Can be replaced by U start time . Optionally, U start time The value of (2) is an integer. For example, a-> For example, a-> For example, a-> Or alternatively, the first and second heat exchangers may be, for example, the number of the cells to be processed, for example, the network device configures only one parameter U when configuring the start opportunity indicating the mth first timer for the terminal device start time Rather than configuring an SFN start time 、Q start time And G start time These three parameters.
Also for example, in equation 3.17Can be replaced by U start time . Optionally, U start time Is a non-integer or integer. For example, the number of the cells to be processed, for example, the network device is configured for the terminalWhen the configuration indicates the starting time of the Mth first timer, only one parameter U is configured start time Rather than configuring an SFN start time 、Q start time 、G start time And R is start time These four parameters.
Also for example, in equations 3.3, 3.8, 3.13 and 3.23Can be replaced by U start time . Optionally, U start time The value of (2) is an integer. For example, a-> For example, the number of the cells to be processed, for example, the number of the cells to be processed, for example, a-> For example, the network device configures only one parameter U when configuring the start opportunity indicating the mth first timer for the terminal device start time Rather than configuring an SFN start time And A start time These two parameters.
Also for example, in equation 3.18Can be replaced by U start time . Optionally, U start time Is a non-integer or integer. For example, the number of the cells to be processed, for example, the network device configures only one parameter U when configuring the start opportunity indicating the mth first timer for the terminal device start time Rather than configuring an SFN start time 、A start time And R is start time These three parameters.
For example, V may be employed start time The number of symbols between the start position of the superframe where the mth first timer is located and the start timing of the mth first timer is indicated.
For example, in equations 3.4, 3.9, 3.14 and 3.24 Can be replaced by V start time . Alternatively, V start time The value of (2) is an integer. For example, a-> For example, a-> For example, the number of the cells to be processed, or (I)> For example, a-> For example, the network device configures only one parameter V when configuring the start timing indicating the mth first timer for the terminal device start time Rather than configuring an SFN start time 、Q start time 、G start time And B start time These four parameters.
Also for example, in equation 3.19 Can be replaced by V start time . Alternatively, V start time Is a non-integer or integer. For example, a-> For example, the network device configures only one parameter V when configuring the start timing indicating the mth first timer for the terminal device start time Rather than configuring an SFN start time 、Q start time 、G start time 、B start time And R is start time These five parameters.
Also for example, in equations 3.5, 3.10, 3.15 and 3.25 Can be replaced by V start time . Alternatively, V start time The value of (2) is an integer. For example, a-> For example, a-> For example, a-> Or (I)> For example, the number of the cells to be processed, for example, the network device configures only one parameter V when configuring the start timing indicating the mth first timer for the terminal device start time Rather than configuring an SFN start time 、A start time And B start time These three parameters.
Also for example, in equation 3.20Can be replaced by V start time . Alternatively, V start time Is a non-integer or integer. For example, the number of the cells to be processed, for example, the network device configures only one parameter V when configuring the start timing indicating the mth first timer for the terminal device start time Rather than configuring an SFN start time 、A start time 、B start time And R is start time These four parameters.
The number of slots included in one frame is not limited to 10, and may be other values, and 10 may be replaced with K.
The term (P-M) may be replaced by P. For example, regardless of the value of M, N is equal to P.
In step 603, the terminal device starts the first timer based on the information of the start timing of the P-th first timer.
Step 603 is an optional step.
Specifically, the terminal device may start the first timer based on the information of the start timing of the P-th first timer in any one of the following embodiments.
In one possible embodiment 1, the terminal device determines the start timing of the first timer based on the information of the start timing of the P-th first timer and the third parameter.
For example, the third parameter is used to indicate the delay before the first timer is started. The duration indicated by the third parameter is smaller than the duration corresponding to one frame, or smaller than the duration corresponding to one subframe, or smaller than the duration corresponding to one time slot, or smaller than the duration corresponding to one symbol, which is not limited. For example, the third parameter is an offset within a frame or a subframe or a slot or a symbol length used in determining the start timing of the first timer. The third parameter is, for example, drx-SlotOffset.
The terminal device starts the first timer after the time domain position corresponding to the information of the start timing of the P-th first timer is shifted to the right by the third parameter.
The terminal device starts the first timer after a duration indicated by the third parameter corresponding to the time domain position of the start opportunity information of the P-th first timer.
It should be noted that, because the value of R is a non-integer, the timing of starting the first timer may fall in the middle of a certain time domain unit. In this case, not only the timer or clock control of the terminal device is difficult, but also the network device may not start scheduling in the middle of a certain time domain unit, and therefore, the terminal device may not receive data or signaling or DCI after starting the first timer in the middle of a certain time domain unit, thereby increasing the power consumption of the terminal device. In this regard, the rounding operation is proposed in the embodiments 2 and 3, so that the terminal device starts the first timer at the starting position of a certain time domain unit, thereby reducing the complexity of the terminal device and reducing the power consumption of the terminal device. The following description will be made respectively:
In another possible embodiment 2, the terminal device starts the first timer based on the SFN, the Q, the fourth parameter, and the third parameter. Or, the terminal device starts the first timer based on the SFN, Q, G, fourth parameter, and third parameter. Or, the terminal device starts the first timer based on the SFN, the a, the fourth parameter, and the third parameter. Or, the terminal device starts the first timer based on SFN, Q, G, H, B, the fourth parameter and the third parameter. Or, the terminal device starts the first timer based on SFN, A, H, B, the fourth parameter and the third parameter. For the explanation of the third parameter, please refer to the description of the third parameter in embodiment 1, which is not repeated here.
Wherein the fourth parameter is determined based on R. Optionally, the time domain position corresponding to the fourth parameter is a starting position of a time domain unit adjacent to or located in the first time domain position, where the first time domain position is a time domain position determined based on SFN, Q and R, or the first time domain position is a time domain position determined based on SFN, Q, G and R, or the first time domain position is a time domain position determined based on SFN, a and R, or the first time domain position is a time domain position determined based on SFN, Q, G, H, B and R, or the first time domain position is a time domain position determined based on SFN, A, H, B and R. Optionally, the time domain unit may be a preset duration, or may be a subframe, or may be a slot, or may be a symbol, or may be a mini-slot, or may be a sub-slot, which is not limited herein. For example, the preset duration may be the precision of the third parameter (e.g., (1/32) ms), other values (e.g., (1/64) ms), etc.
For example, time domain units are taken as time slots, and subcarrier spacing is taken as an example of 30 kHz. If the SFN indicated by the information of the start timing of the P-th first timer is 0, q is 1, and the value of r is (2/3) ms, the first time domain position is between the start position of the frame 0 subframe 1 time slot 1 and the start position of the frame 0 subframe 2 time slot 0. In this example, the starting position of the time domain unit adjacent to the first time domain position may be the starting position of the time slot 1 of the subframe 1 or the starting position of the time slot 0 of the subframe 2.
Optionally, the time domain position corresponding to the fourth parameter is a time domain position obtained by rounding the first time domain position. The terminal device may perform a rounding operation based on the first time domain position to obtain a time domain position corresponding to the fourth parameter. Or, the terminal device may perform a rounding operation based on R to obtain the fourth parameter. The rounding operation includes a down rounding operation, an up rounding operation, a rounding operation, or the like.
Illustratively, the fourth parameter and R satisfy any one of the following formulas, and the terminal device may determine the fourth parameter based on the following formulas.
E=floor [ m1++s ] ×s; (equation 5.1)
E=ceil [ m1++s ] ×s; (equation 5.2)
E=round [ m1++s ] ×s; (equation 5.3)
Wherein E is a fourth parameter, M1 is R or an absolute value of R, S is a time length of one time domain unit, floor [ ] represents a downward rounding operation, ceil [ ] represents an upward rounding operation, and round [ ] represents a rounding operation.
For example, if the terminal device performs the downward rounding operation according to the granularity of the slots based on R, it is available to bring m1= (2/3) ms and a=0.5 ms into formula 5.1, where e=0.5 ms (i.e. the duration corresponding to one slot), i.e. the time domain position corresponding to the fourth parameter is the time domain position shifted rightward by one slot from the start position of the slot 0 of the subframe 1 of the frame 0, i.e. the start position of the slot 1 of the subframe 1 of the frame 0. If the terminal device performs the rounding operation based on R according to the granularity of the time slot, it is available to bring m1= (2/3) ms and a=0.5 ms into formula 5.2, where e=1 ms (i.e. the duration corresponding to two time slots), i.e. the time domain position corresponding to the fourth parameter is the time domain position shifted rightward by two time slots from the start position of the time slot 0 of the subframe 1 of the frame 0, i.e. the start position of the time slot 0 of the subframe 2 of the frame 0. If the terminal device performs rounding operation according to the granularity of the time slot based on R, it is available to bring m1= (2/3) ms and a=0.5 ms into formula 5.3, where e=0.5 ms (i.e. the duration corresponding to one time slot), i.e. the time domain position corresponding to the fourth parameter is the time domain position shifted rightward by one time slot from the start position of the time slot 0 of the subframe 1 of the frame 0, i.e. the start position of the time slot 1 of the subframe 1 of the frame 0.
The terminal device starts the first timer after determining the fourth parameter based on R, based on the time domain positions corresponding to the SFN, Q, and fourth parameter, based on the time domain positions corresponding to the SFN, Q, G, and fourth parameter, based on the time domain positions corresponding to the SFN, a, and fourth parameter, based on the time domain positions corresponding to the SFN, Q, G, H, B and fourth parameter, based on the time domain positions corresponding to the SFN, A, H, B and fourth parameter, and then shifting the duration indicated by the third parameter to the right.
The terminal device starts the first timer after shifting the sum of the time durations indicated by the fourth parameter and the third parameter to the right, based on the time domain position corresponding to the SFN, Q, G, or based on the time domain position corresponding to the SFN, a, or based on the time domain position corresponding to SFN, Q, G, H, B, or based on the time domain position corresponding to SFN, A, H, B.
The terminal device starts the first timer at the time-domain position corresponding to the SFN, Q, and fourth parameter or after the duration indicated by the third parameter starting at the time-domain position corresponding to the SFN, Q, G, and fourth parameter or at the time-domain position corresponding to the SFN, a, and fourth parameter or at the time-domain position corresponding to SFN, Q, G, H, B and fourth parameter or at the time-domain position corresponding to SFN, A, H, B and fourth parameter.
In this embodiment, since the time domain position corresponding to the fourth parameter is located at the start position of a certain time domain unit, it is beneficial to make the moment when the terminal device starts the first timer be located at the start position of a certain time domain unit, so that the moment when the terminal device starts the first timer is avoided to fall in the middle of a certain time domain unit, thereby being beneficial to reducing the complexity of the terminal device and also beneficial to saving energy of the terminal device.
In another possible embodiment 3, the terminal device starts the first timer based on the SFN, Q and the fifth parameter. Or, the terminal device starts the first timer based on the SFN, Q, G, and fifth parameters. Or, the terminal device starts the first timer based on the SFN, a and the fifth parameter. Or, the terminal device starts the first timer based on SFN, Q, G, H, B and the fifth parameter. Or, the terminal device starts the first timer based on SFN, A, H, B and the fifth parameter. The fifth parameter is determined based on R and the third parameter. For the explanation of R and the third parameter, refer to the foregoing description, and are not repeated here.
Optionally, the time domain position corresponding to the fifth parameter is a starting position of a time domain unit adjacent to or located in the second time domain position, the second time domain position is a time domain position determined based on the SFN, Q, R and the third parameter, or the second time domain position is a time domain position determined based on the SFN, Q, G, R and the third parameter, or the second time domain position is a time domain position determined based on the SFN, a, R and the third parameter, or the second time domain position is a time domain position determined based on the SFN, Q, G, H, B, R and the third parameter, or the second time domain position is a time domain position determined based on the SFN, A, H, B, R and the third parameter.
For example, time domain units are taken as time slots, and subcarrier spacing is taken as an example of 30 kHz. If the SFN indicated by the information of the start timing of the P-th first timer is 0, q is 1, r has a value of (2/3) ms, and the third parameter has a value of (16/32) ms=0.5 ms, the second time domain position is between the start position of the frame 0 subframe 2 slot 0 and the start position of the frame 0 subframe 2 slot 1. In this example, the starting position of the time domain unit adjacent to or located in the second time domain position is the starting position of the subframe 2 slot 0, and may be the starting position of the subframe 2 slot 1.
Optionally, the time domain position corresponding to the fifth parameter is a time domain position obtained by rounding the second time domain position. The terminal device may perform a rounding operation based on the second time domain position to obtain a time domain position corresponding to the fifth parameter. Or, the terminal device may perform a rounding operation based on the sum of R and the third parameter to obtain the fifth parameter. The rounding operation includes a down rounding operation, an up rounding operation, a rounding operation, or the like.
Illustratively, any of the following formulas is satisfied between the fifth parameter, R and the third parameter, and the terminal device may determine the fifth parameter based on the following formula:
F=floor [ (m1+drx-SlotOffset)/(S ] ×s; (equation 6.1)
F=ceil [ (m1+drx-SlotOffset)/(S ] ×s; (equation 6.2)
F=round [ (m1+drx-SlotOffset)/(S ] ×s; (equation 6.3)
Wherein F is a fifth parameter, M1 is R or an absolute value of R, A is a time length of one time domain unit, floor [ ] represents a downward rounding operation, ceil [ ] represents an upward rounding operation, round [ ] represents a rounding operation, and drx-SlotOffset is a third parameter.
The terminal device starts the first timer at the time domain position corresponding to the SFN, Q, and the fifth parameter or at the time domain position corresponding to the SFN, Q, G, and the fifth parameter or at the time domain position corresponding to the SFN, a, and the fifth parameter or at the time domain position corresponding to the SFN, Q, G, H, B and the fifth parameter or at the time domain position corresponding to the SFN, A, H, B and the fifth parameter.
The terminal device starts the first timer based on the time domain positions corresponding to SFN and Q, or based on the time domain positions corresponding to SFN, Q, and G, or based on the time domain positions corresponding to SFN, a, or based on the time domain position corresponding to SFN, Q, G, H, B, or based on the time domain position corresponding to SFN, A, H, B, and then shifts the fifth parameter to the right.
The terminal device starts the first timer at the time-domain position corresponding to SFN, Q or at the time-domain position corresponding to SFN, Q, G or at the time-domain position corresponding to SFN, a or at the time-domain position corresponding to SFN, Q, G, H, B or at the time-domain position corresponding to SFN, A, H, B for a duration indicated by the fifth parameter.
In this embodiment, since the time domain position corresponding to the fifth parameter is located at the start position of a certain time domain unit, it is beneficial to make the moment when the terminal device starts the first timer be located at the start position of a certain time domain unit, so that the moment when the terminal device starts the first timer is avoided to fall in the middle of a certain time domain unit, thereby being beneficial to reducing the complexity of the terminal device and also beneficial to saving energy of the terminal device.
In another possible embodiment 4, the terminal device starts the first timer based on the SFN, Q and the third parameter. Or, the terminal device starts the first timer based on the SFN, Q, G and the third parameter. Or, the terminal device starts the first timer based on the SFN, a and the third parameter. Or, the terminal device starts the first timer based on SFN, Q, G, H, B and the third parameter. Or, the terminal device starts the first timer based on SFN, A, H, B and the third parameter.
The terminal device starts the first timer after shifting the third parameter rightward at the time domain position corresponding to SFN, Q, or at the time domain position corresponding to SFN, Q, G, or at the time domain position corresponding to SFN, a, or at the time domain position corresponding to SFN, Q, G, H, B, or at the time domain position corresponding to SFN, A, H, B.
The terminal device may start the first timer at a time domain position corresponding to the SFN, Q, and the third parameter, or at a time domain position corresponding to the SFN, Q, G, and the third parameter, or at a time domain position corresponding to the SFN, a, and the third parameter, or at a time domain position corresponding to SFN, Q, G, H, B and the third parameter, or at a time domain position corresponding to SFN, A, H, B and the third parameter.
The terminal device starts the first timer after a duration indicated by the third parameter, which is indicated by the time domain position corresponding to SFN, Q or the time domain position corresponding to SFN, Q, G or the time domain position corresponding to SFN, a or the time domain position corresponding to SFN, Q, G, H, B or the time domain position corresponding to SFN, A, H, B.
In another possible embodiment 5, the terminal device starts a first timer based on the first SFN, the first Q, and the third parameter. Or, the terminal device starts the first timer based on the first SFN, the first Q, the first G, and the third parameter. Or, the terminal device starts the first timer based on the first SFN, the first a, and the third parameter. Or, the terminal device starts the first timer based on the first SFN, the first Q, the first G, the first H, the first B, and the third parameter. Or, the terminal device starts the first timer based on the first SFN, the first a, the first H, the first B, and the third parameter.
Illustratively, any of the following formulas is satisfied among the first SFN, the first Q, the SFN, the Q, and the R, and the terminal device may determine the first SFN and the first Q based on the following formulas:
first sfn×10+first q=sfn×10+q+floor (R); (equation 7.1)
First sfn×10+first q=sfn×10+q+ceil (R); (equation 7.2)
First sfn×10+first q=sfn×10+q+round (R); (equation 7.3)
It should be noted that, the formulas 7.1, 7.2 and 7.3 may also have one or more variants, for example:
first sfn×10+first q=floor (sfn×10+q+r); (equation 7.1.1)
First sfn×10+first q=ceil (sfn×10+q+r); (equation 7.2.1)
First sfn×10+first q=round (sfn×10+q+r); (equation 7.3.1)
First sfn×10+first q=sfn×10+floor (q+r); (equation 7.1.2)
First sfn×10+first q=sfn×10+ceil (q+r); (equation 7.2.2)
First sfn×10+first q=sfn×10+round (q+m); (equation 7.3.2)
Illustratively, any of the following formulas is satisfied between the first SFN, the first Q, the first G, SFN, Q, G, and the R, and the terminal device may determine the first SFN and the first Q based on the following formulas:
illustratively, any of the following formulas is satisfied among the first SFN, the first a, the SFN, the a, and the R, and the terminal device may determine the first SFN and the first Q based on the following formulas:
Illustratively, any one of the following formulas is satisfied among the first SFN, the first Q, the first G, the first H, the first B, SFN, Q, G, H, B, and the R, and the terminal device may determine the first SFN and the first Q based on the following formulas:
illustratively, any one of the following formulas is satisfied among the first SFN, the first a, the first H, the first B, SFN, A, H, B, and the R, and the terminal device may determine the first SFN and the first Q based on the following formulas:
the first timer is started by the terminal device at a time domain position corresponding to the first SFN, the first Q, or at a time domain position corresponding to the first SFN, the first Q, the first G, or at a time domain position corresponding to the first SFN, the first a, or at a time domain position corresponding to the first SFN, the first Q, the first G, the first H, the first B, or at a time domain position corresponding to the first SFN, the first a, the first H, the first B, which is shifted to the right by a third parameter.
The terminal device may start the first timer at a time domain position corresponding to the first SFN, the first Q, the first G, and the third parameter, or at a time domain position corresponding to the first SFN, the first Q, the first G, the first H, the first B, and the third parameter, or at a time domain position corresponding to the first SFN, the first a, the first H, the first B, and the third parameter.
In another possible embodiment 6, the terminal device determines the start timing of the first timer based on the information of the start timing of the P-th first timer.
The terminal device starts the first timer at a time domain position corresponding to the information of the start opportunity of the P-th first timer.
In another possible embodiment 7, the terminal device starts the first timer based on the SFN, Q and the fourth parameter. Or, the terminal device starts the first timer based on the SFN, Q, G, and fourth parameters. Or, the terminal device starts the first timer based on the SFN, a, and the fourth parameter. Or, the terminal device starts the first timer based on SFN, Q, G, H, B, the fourth parameter. Or, the terminal device starts the first timer based on SFN, A, H, B, the fourth parameter.
The terminal device, after determining the fourth parameter based on R, starts the first timer at the time domain position corresponding to the SFN, Q, and fourth parameter or at the time domain position corresponding to the SFN, Q, G, and fourth parameter or at the time domain position corresponding to the SFN, a, and fourth parameter or at the time domain position corresponding to the SFN, Q, G, H, B and fourth parameter or at the time domain position corresponding to the SFN, A, H, B and fourth parameter.
The terminal device starts the first timer after shifting the duration indicated by the fourth parameter to the right based on the time domain position corresponding to SFN, Q, or based on the time domain position corresponding to SFN, Q, G, or based on the time domain position corresponding to SFN, a, or based on the time domain position corresponding to SFN, Q, G, H, B, or based on the time domain position corresponding to SFN, A, H, B.
The terminal device starts the first timer at the time-domain position corresponding to SFN, Q or at the time-domain position corresponding to SFN, Q, G or at the time-domain position corresponding to SFN, a or at the time-domain position corresponding to SFN, Q, G, H, B or at the time-domain position corresponding to SFN, A, H, B for a duration indicated by the fourth parameter.
In another possible embodiment 8, the terminal device starts the first timer based on SFN, Q. Or, the terminal device starts the first timer based on SFN, Q, G. Or, the terminal device starts the first timer based on SFN, a. Or, the terminal device starts the first timer based on SFN, Q, G, H, B. Or, the terminal device starts the first timer based on SFN, A, H, B.
The terminal device starts the first timer at the time domain position corresponding to SFN, Q or at the time domain position corresponding to SFN, Q, G or at the time domain position corresponding to SFN, a or at the time domain position corresponding to SFN, Q, G, H, B or at the time domain position corresponding to SFN, A, H, B.
In another possible embodiment 9, the terminal device starts a first timer based on the first SFN, the first Q. Or, the terminal device starts the first timer based on the first SFN, the first Q, and the first G. Or, the terminal device starts a first timer based on the first SFN, the first a. Or, the terminal device starts the first timer based on the first SFN, the first Q, the first G, the first H, the first B. Or, the terminal device starts the first timer based on the first SFN, the first a, the first H, and the first B.
The terminal device starts the first timer at a time domain position corresponding to the first SFN, the first Q, or at a time domain position corresponding to the first SFN, the first Q, the first G, or at a time domain position corresponding to the first SFN, the first a, or at a time domain position corresponding to the first SFN, the first Q, the first G, the first H, the first B, or at a time domain position corresponding to the first SFN, the first a, the first H, the first B.
Note that, in any of the above embodiments 4, 5, 8, and 9, the start timing of the first timer is not related to R, so that the information of the start timing of the P-th first timer related to the start timing of the first timer includes SFN and Q, or SFN, Q, G, or SFN, a, or SFN, Q, G, H, B, or SFN, A, H, B, which may not include R, and the present application is not limited.
In this embodiment, the terminal device may calculate the information of the start time of the P first timer matched with the service, so that the service period with a value that is a non-integer may be applied to the DRX mechanism, so that the DRX is matched with the service, thereby reducing power consumption of the terminal device, improving transmission reliability or reducing transmission delay, and improving communication quality and efficiency.
Optionally, the present application may further include: the terminal equipment determines the information of the starting time of the P+1st first timer based on the information of the starting time of the P first timer.
Alternatively, in the case where the DRX cycle is an integer multiple (e.g., Y times) of the traffic cycle, or in the case where the DRX cycle is an integer, the terminal device determines the information of the start timing of the p+1th first timer based on the information of the start timing of the P-th first timer.
Optionally, in a case where the DRX cycle is equal to the service cycle, or in a case where the DRX cycle is a non-integer, the terminal device determines the information of the start timing of the p+1st first timer based on the information of the start timing of the P first timer.
Optionally, the determining, by the terminal device, the information of the start timing of the p+1st first timer based on the information of the start timing of the P first timer may include: the terminal equipment determines the information of the starting time of the P+alpha first timer based on the information of the starting time of the P first timer.
Illustratively, α is an integer greater than or equal to 1. Illustratively, α has Y-1 values, e.g., α is 1,2, …, (Y-2), (Y-1). For example, the DRX cycle is 50ms, the traffic cycle is 50/3ms, y is equal to 3, α has 2 values, α= {1,2}. For example, the DRX cycle is 100ms, the traffic cycle is 100/9ms, y is 9, α has 8 values, α= {1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8}.
It should be noted that, the content related to the information of the start time of the p+α first timer is similar to the content related to the information of the start time of the P first timer, and the information of the start time of the P first timer may be replaced with the information of the start time of the p+α first timer to understand, which is not described herein again.
In one possible implementation B1, the information of the start timing of the P-th first timer and the information of the start timing of the p+α -th first timer satisfy the following relationship:
third number corresponding to the information of the start timing of the p+α first timer=third number corresponding to the information of the start timing of the P first timer+f [ (T) DRX /Y)×α];
For example, the DRX cycle is 50ms, the traffic cycle is 50/3ms, y is equal to 3, c=0, 1,2, the information of the start timing of the P-th first timer includes sfn=0 and q=0, and if the downward rounding operation is adopted, the information of the start timing of the p+α -th first timer corresponds to sfn×10+p+α -th first timer, the information of the start timing of the p+2-th first timer includes sfn=3 and q=3 when the information of the start timing of the p+th first timer corresponds to q+f [ (50/3) ×α ], and when α=1, the information of the start timing of the p+1-th first timer includes sfn=1 and q=6, and when α=2.
Alternatively, implementation B1 may be applicable where the DRX cycle is an integer multiple of the traffic cycle. For example, the DRX period is 50ms, and the service period is 50/3m; or, the DRX period is 100ms, and the service period is 100/9ms.
In another possible implementation B2, the fourth information and the seventh information satisfy the following relationship:
third number corresponding to the information of the start timing of the p+α first timer=third number corresponding to the information of the start timing of the P first timer+f [ (T) DRX )×α];
Alternatively, the implementation A2 may be applicable where DRX is a non-integer, e.g., 25/3ms, 50/3ms, 100/9ms, etc.
In this embodiment, the terminal device may determine, based on the fourth information configured by the network device and the at least one DRX cycle, a start timing of the first timer after the at least one DRX cycle from the start time domain unit. Because the starting time of the first timer obtained by the determination of the terminal equipment is periodic under the condition of crossing superframes, the alignment of DRX of the network equipment and the terminal equipment is facilitated. Or the DRX cycle is matched with the service cycle or the DRX and the service are matched, so that the power consumption of the terminal equipment is reduced, and/or the time delay of the terminal equipment for receiving data is reduced. It should be noted that since, for a signaling or message received by the terminal device from the network device, it takes a period of time for the physical layer of the terminal device to successfully parse the signaling or message to an upper layer (e.g., RRC layer) of the terminal device, there may be a time delay between the time when the network device transmits the signaling or information and the time when the upper layer of the terminal device parses the aforementioned signaling or information. For example, the time when the network device transmits the fifth information may not coincide with the time when the upper layer of the terminal device parses out the fifth information. The fifth information may be the DRX configuration in the embodiment corresponding to any one or more of fig. 2, fig. 3, fig. 5, or fig. 6, or the first information or the second information in the embodiment corresponding to fig. 2, or the first offset in the embodiment corresponding to fig. 3, or the first parameter in the embodiment corresponding to fig. 5, or the fourth information in the embodiment corresponding to fig. 6.
For example, taking fig. 8 as an example, the fifth information is carried in an RRC message, the network device sends the fifth information at the end of the last superframe (for example, superframe j, where j is greater than or equal to 0), and the upper layer of the terminal device parses the fifth information until the next superframe, which will cause the positions of the starting moments of the first timers determined by the network device and the terminal device to be different.
In this regard, the present application also provides a communication method shown in fig. 9 for solving the foregoing problems. It should be appreciated that the corresponding embodiment of fig. 9 may be combined with any of the previous embodiments of fig. 2, 3, 5 and 6. In the corresponding embodiment of fig. 9, the terminal device and the network device will perform the following steps, respectively:
step 901, network equipment sends first indication information to terminal equipment; accordingly, the terminal device receives the first indication information from the network device.
Optionally, the first indication information is carried in DRX configuration, or the first indication information is carried in RRC signaling.
Optionally, the first indication information is used to indicate a position of a moment of the fifth information sent by the network device in the superframe.
Optionally, the first indication information is used to indicate whether the network device transmits the fifth information in the second half of the superframes.
The fifth information may be, for example, the DRX configuration in the embodiment corresponding to any one or more of fig. 2, fig. 3, fig. 5, or fig. 6, or the first information or the second information in the embodiment corresponding to fig. 2, or the first offset in the embodiment corresponding to fig. 3, or the first parameter in the embodiment corresponding to fig. 5, or the fourth information in the embodiment corresponding to fig. 6.
In one possible implementation, the first indication information indicates, through two different values, whether the network device transmits the fifth information in the second half of the superframe.
Illustratively, one of the values is used to instruct the network device to transmit the fifth information in the second half of the one superframe and the other value is used to instruct the network device to transmit the fifth information in the first half of the one superframe.
For example, the value of the first indication information may be 0 or 1. When the value of the first indication information is 1, the time domain unit for indicating the network equipment to send the fifth information is positioned in the second half of the super frame where the time domain unit is positioned; when the value of the first indication information is 0, the time domain unit for indicating the network equipment to send the fifth information is positioned in the first half of the super frame where the time domain unit is positioned. For another example, the value of the first indication information may be 0 or 512. When the value of the first indication information is 512, the time domain unit for indicating the network device to send the fifth information is located in the second half of the super frame where the time domain unit is located; when the value of the first indication information is 0, the time domain unit for indicating the network equipment to send the fifth information is positioned in the first half of the super frame where the time domain unit is positioned. It should be appreciated that in practical applications, the other two values may also be set to indicate whether the network device transmits the fifth information in the second half of a superframe.
In another possible embodiment, the fifth information is sent by the first indication information indicating whether the network device is in the second half of the super-frame.
Illustratively, the network device sends first indication information to the terminal device, which indicates that the network device sends fifth information in the second half of the superframes; the network device does not send the first indication information to the terminal device, indicating that the network device sends the fifth information in the first half of the superframes in one superframe. Or vice versa. And will not be described in detail herein.
Alternatively, step 901 may be replaced by: the network equipment sends indication information whether the first indication information exists or not to the terminal equipment; accordingly, the terminal device receives the indication information of whether the first indication information exists from the network device.
It should be appreciated that, in practical applications, any of the foregoing embodiments may be used to implement the foregoing first indication information.
Optionally, the first indication information is used to determine an index of a superframe where the terminal device obtains the fifth information. For example, the terminal device may determine, based on the first indication information, whether a superframe at which the terminal device acquires the fifth information and a superframe at which the network device transmits the fifth information are the same superframe.
For example, the moment when the terminal device acquires the fifth information can be understood as: the terminal device decodes or parses out the moment of the fifth information.
For example, the time when the terminal device obtains the fifth information may be the time when the RRC layer of the terminal device parses out the fifth information. For example, the RRC layer of the terminal device parses out the timing of the DRX configuration.
Optionally, the first indication information may further include an index of a superframe at which the network device transmits the fifth information. Hereinafter, L is used to denote an index of a superframe at which a network device transmits fifth information, where L is greater than or equal to 0. It should be understood that when the index of the superframe at the moment when the network device transmits the fifth information is a value predefined by the protocol (for example, the index is 0), the first indication information transmitted by the network device to the terminal device may not carry the foregoing L.
For example, L may be an integer, e.g., L is 1 or 0.
In step 902, the terminal device determines, based on the first indication information and/or the first time information, an index of a superframe where a time point at which the terminal device obtains the fifth information is located.
For example, the moment when the terminal device acquires the fifth information may be the first superframe.
In one possible embodiment, the terminal device determines an index of a superframe at which a time point at which the terminal device acquires the fifth information is located based on the first indication information and the first time information.
Wherein the first time information includes information of a time at which the terminal device acquired the fifth information. It should be understood that the information of the time when the terminal device obtains the fifth information may be a time or a time range. Illustratively, the first time information is a time or period when the terminal device acquires the DRX configuration. For example, the first time information is a time or period when the RRC layer of the terminal device parses out the DRX configuration.
For example, if the first indication information indicates that the network device transmits the fifth information in the second half of the superframes, and the time when the terminal device acquires the fifth information is in the first half of the superframes where the time when the terminal device acquires the fifth information, the terminal device determines that the index of the superframe where the time when the terminal device acquires the fifth information is (l+1).
In another possible embodiment, the terminal device determines, based on the first time information, an index of a superframe at which a time point at which the terminal device acquires the fifth information is located.
For example, if the time when the terminal device obtains the fifth information is in the second half of the superframe where the time when the terminal device obtains the fifth information is located, the terminal device determines that the index of the superframe where the time when the terminal device obtains the fifth information is located is L.
In another possible embodiment, the terminal device determines, according to the first indication information, an index of a superframe at which a time point at which the terminal device acquires the fifth information is located.
For example, if the first indication information indicates that the network device transmits the fifth information in the first half of the superframes in one superframe, the terminal device determines that the index of the superframe where the terminal device acquires the fifth information is L.
In this embodiment, the terminal device can determine, through the first indication information and/or the first time information, whether the superframe where the moment when the network device sends the fifth information is the same superframe as the superframe where the moment when the terminal device obtains the fifth information is the same superframe. The superframe where the moment of sending the fifth information by the network device is aligned with the superframe where the moment of obtaining the fifth information by the terminal device is located, so that the matching of the fifth information and the corresponding superframe is guaranteed, the alignment of the DRX by the UE and the base station is facilitated, the power consumption of the terminal device is reduced, and/or the time delay of receiving data by the terminal device is reduced.
It should be understood that when the embodiment corresponding to fig. 9 is combined with the embodiment corresponding to fig. 2, for example, the first superframe is a superframe where the terminal device obtains the DRX configuration at the time. The terminal device determines the index of the superframe where the moment when the terminal device obtains the fifth information is based on the first indication information and/or the first time information, which may be understood that the terminal device determines the index of the first superframe based on the first indication information and/or the first time information.
For example, if the first indication information indicates that the network device transmits the DRX configuration in the second half of the superframes, and the timing at which the terminal device acquires the DRX configuration is in the first half of the first superframe, the terminal device determines that the index of the first superframe is (l+1).
For example, if the timing at which the terminal device acquires the DRX configuration is within the second half of the first superframe, the terminal device determines the index of the first superframe as L.
For example, if the first indication information indicates that the network device transmits the DRX configuration in the first half of the superframes in one superframe, the terminal device determines the index of the first superframe as L.
It should be appreciated that when the embodiment corresponding to fig. 9 is combined with the embodiment corresponding to fig. 6, the first indication information may include or be replaced with the second indication information. For example, the terminal device may also refer to the second instruction information when calculating the start timing of the first timer. The details will be described below in conjunction with fig. 10:
in step 1001, the network device obtains fourth information.
Step 1001 is an optional step. For example, the fourth information may be specified by a protocol, may be stored by the terminal device itself, or may be obtained by another method, and the present application is not limited thereto.
Specifically, for the fourth information, the start time domain unit and the start time of the mth first timer, please refer to the related description in the step 601, which is not repeated here.
Step 1002, the network device sends fourth information to the terminal device; accordingly, the terminal device receives the fourth information from the network device.
Optionally, the network device may send the fourth information to the terminal device in the DRX configuration; accordingly, the terminal device may receive a DRX configuration from the network device, the DRX configuration including fourth information.
Alternatively, step 1002 in this embodiment may be replaced by the terminal device obtaining the fourth information.
Optionally, step 1002 in this embodiment may include the terminal device acquiring a plurality of fourth information.
Optionally, step 1002 in this embodiment may include the terminal device determining a plurality of fourth information based on the seventh information.
The description related to step 1002 may refer to the description related to step 601, which is not repeated herein. The description related to the fourth information may refer to the description in the embodiment described in fig. 6, and will not be repeated here.
Step 1003, the network device sends second indication information to the terminal device; accordingly, the terminal device receives the second indication information from the network device.
It should be noted that, step 1003 or step 1004 may be implemented as a separate embodiment. Step 1003 and step 1004 may also be implemented as separate embodiments.
Illustratively, the second indication information is for indicating information of the reference frame. The information of the reference frame is used to determine information of a start timing of the first timer. It is understood that the information of the reference frame is information used in calculating the start timing of the first timer.
Optionally, the information of the reference frame includes a frame number of the reference frame. Illustratively, the frame number of the reference frame includes 512 and/or 0. For example, if the time when the network device transmits the DRX configuration is located before SFN0 and SFN511, the frame number of the reference frame indicated by the second indication information is 0; if the time when the network device transmits the DRX configuration is located before SFN512 and SFN1023, the frame number of the reference frame indicated by the second indication information is 512. For example, if the time when the network device transmits the DRX configuration is between SFN0 and SFN511, the frame number of the reference frame indicated by the second indication information is 0; if the time when the network device transmits the DRX configuration is between SFN512 and SFN1023, the frame number of the reference frame indicated by the second indication information is 512.
Illustratively, the second indication information is information indicating the number of frames.
Optionally, the information of the reference frame includes a frame number of the reference frame. Illustratively, the frame number of the reference frame includes 512 and 0. If the time of the network device sending the DRX configuration is located before SFN0 and SFN512, the frame number of the reference frame indicated by the second indication information is 0; if the time when the network device transmits the DRX configuration is located before SFN512 and SFN0, the frame number of the reference frame indicated by the second indication information is 512.
Optionally, the information of the number of frames includes the number of frames. Illustratively, the number of frames includes 512 and 0. For example, if the time when the network device transmits the DRX configuration is located before SFN0 and SFN511, the number of frames indicated by the second indication information is 0; if the time when the network device transmits the DRX configuration is located before SFN512 and SFN1023, the number of frames indicated by the second indication information is 512. Exemplary, the number of frames includes 512 and/or 0. For example, if the time when the network device transmits the DRX configuration is between SFN0 and SFN511, the number of frames indicated by the second indication information is 0; if the time when the network device transmits the DRX configuration is between SFN512 and SFN1023, the number of frames indicated by the second indication information is 512.
Alternatively, the network device may carry the second indication information and the fourth information in the same message or signaling. For example, the network device may send the second indication information and the fourth information to the terminal device carrying in the DRX configuration. The terminal device may receive the DRX configuration from the network device. The DRX configuration includes fourth information and second indication information.
In step 1004, the terminal device determines information of start timing of the P-th first timer based on the fourth information and the second instruction information.
Step 1004 is an optional step.
Optionally, "the terminal device determines the information of the start timing of the P-th first timer based on the fourth information and the second instruction information" includes: the terminal equipment sequentially determines the information of the starting time of the P first timer based on the fourth information and the second indication information.
For example, sequencing may be understood as increasing order of P, or sequencing may be understood as increasing order of J.
The information of the start timing of the P-th first timer may include information of the start timing of the P-related first timer, which may or may not be information of the start timing of the P-th first timer, and the present application is not limited thereto.
Wherein P is an integer of 0 or more, and P is M or more. For example, the P-th first timer may be understood as a certain first timer after the M-th first timer. Optionally, the start timing of the P first timer and the start timing of the M first timer differ by at least one DRX cycle. For example, the granularity of the time domain unit corresponding to the start time of the P first timer is the same as the granularity of the time domain unit corresponding to the start time of the M first timer. Specifically, the start timing of the P first timer is described in detail in the foregoing step 603, and refer to the foregoing step 603 specifically.
It should be noted that the value range of P may not be a continuous integer, for example, P may be 0, 3, 6, 9, etc., but 1, 2, 4, 5, 7, 8, etc.; alternatively, the value range of P may be a continuous integer, for example, 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, etc., and the present application is not limited thereto.
One possible implementation, p=p or J. J comprises an integer greater than or equal to 0.
Another possible implementation, p=c+y×j.
Another possible implementation, p=y×j.
For the P-related content, reference may be made to the description in step 603, and details are not repeated here.
Optionally, the terminal device determines the information of the start timing of the P first timer based on the fourth information, the information of the reference frame, and the DRX cycle. Optionally, the terminal device determines the information of the start time of the P first timer based on the fourth information, the information of the reference frame and the first period. Wherein the first period is equal to the cumulative sum of the N DRX cycles. One possible implementation, N is equal to (P-M) or P. Another possible implementation, N is equal to (P/Y) -M, or P/Y. In another possible implementation, N is equal to [ (P-C)/Y ] -M or (P-C)/Y. For example, N is greater than or equal to 0.
In one possible implementation, as shown in fig. 11A or 11B, the terminal device determines the start timing of the P-th first timer according to the following condition:
The remainder of dividing the sum of the (P-M) DRX cycles, the fourth number, and the first number by the second number is equal to the third number; or alternatively;
third number= (((cumulative sum of (P-M) DRX cycles) +fourth number+first number) mod second number.
In the present application, (P-M) DRX cycles may be replaced with N DRX cycles.
In another possible implementation, (P-M) DRX cycles may be replaced with N DRX cycles.
Optionally, the first number is the number of time domain units between the start position of the superframe where the mth first timer is located and the start time of the mth first timer.
Optionally, the second number is a number of time domain units contained in one superframe.
Optionally, the third number is the number of time domain units between the start position of the superframe where the P first timer is located and the start time of the P first timer.
Optionally, the fourth number is the number of time domain units between the start position of the superframe where the frame indicated by the second indication information is located and the frame indicated by the second indication information; or, the number of time domain units between the frame indicated by the second indication information and the end position of the superframe where the frame indicated by the second indication information is located.
Optionally, the process of determining the information related to the start timing of the P first timer by the terminal device based on the fourth information, the information of the reference frame, and the accumulated sum of the (P-M) DRX cycles may specifically be: (1) determining a fourth number based on the information of the reference frame; (2) determining a first number based on the fourth information; (3) Determining a remainder of dividing a sum of the cumulative sum of the first number, the fourth number, and the (P-M) DRX cycles by the second number to obtain a third number; (4) The start time related information of the first timer in the P-th DRX cycle is determined based on the third number.
It should be understood that when the granularity of the time domain units indicated by the fourth information is different, the formula used when the terminal device calculates the start opportunity of the first timer is different. The following description will be made respectively:
in one class of embodiments 1#, the following implementations are included:
in one possible embodiment, whenThe fourth information includes the frame number SFN of the frame in which the starting time domain unit is located start time And the subframe number Q of the starting time domain unit start time And determining the information of the starting time of the P first timer by the terminal equipment based on the fourth information and the information of the reference frame, wherein the information satisfies the following formula 4.1:
[(SFN×10)+Q]=[(SFN reference to ×10)+(SFN start time ×10+Q start time )+N×T DRX ]mod (d×10); (equation 4.1)
Wherein SFN Reference to Frame number of reference frame indicated for the second indication information. The SFN is the frame number of the start timing of the P-th first timer. Q is the subframe number of the starting time of the P first timer. SFN (SFN) start time Is the frame number of the starting time of the Mth first timer. Q (Q) start time Is the subframe number of the starting time of the Mth first timer. (N X T) DRX ) The first period is a unit of a subframe. T (T) DRX Representing the duration of one DRX cycle. Alternatively, the DRX cycle is a long DRX cycle (DRX-LongCycle). D is the number of frames that a superframe contains. Illustratively, d=1024, meaning that one superframe includes 1024 frames.
In another possible embodiment, when the fourth information includes a frame number SFN of the frame in which the start time domain unit is located start time Subframe number Q of subframe in which the start time domain unit is located start time Time slot number G of starting time domain unit start time And determining the information of the starting time of the P first timer by the terminal equipment based on the fourth information and the information of the reference frame, wherein the information satisfies the following formula 4.2:
wherein SFN Reference to Frame number of reference frame indicated for the second indication information. The SFN is the frame number of the start timing of the P-th first timer. Q is the subframe number of the starting time of the P first timer. G is the index of the time slot corresponding to the starting time of the P first timer in one subframe. SFN (SFN) start time Is the frame number of the starting time of the Mth first timer. Q (Q) start time Is the subframe number of the starting time of the Mth first timer. G start time And the index of the time slot corresponding to the starting time of the Mth first timer in one subframe.Is the number of slots contained in one subframe. (N X T) DRX ) The first period is a unit of a subframe. T (T) DRX Representing the duration of one DRX cycle. D is the number of frames that a superframe contains. Illustratively, d=1024, meaning that one superframe includes 1024 frames.
In another possible embodiment, when the fourth information includes a frame number SFN of the frame in which the start time domain unit is located start time And time slot number A of time domain unit start time And determining the information of the starting time of the P first timer by the terminal equipment based on the fourth information and the information of the reference frame, wherein the information satisfies the following formula 4.3:
wherein SFN Reference to Frame number of reference frame indicated for the second indication information. The SFN is the frame number of the start timing of the P-th first timer. A is the index of the time slot corresponding to the starting time of the P first timer in a system frame. SFN (SFN) start time Is the frame number of the starting time of the Mth first timer. A is that start time And the index of the time slot corresponding to the starting time of the Mth first timer in one system frame. Is the number of slots contained in one subframe. (N X T) DRX ) The first period is a unit of a subframe. T (T) DRX Representing the duration of one DRX cycle. Alternatively, the DRX cycle is a long DRX cycle (DRX-LongCycle). D is the number of frames that a superframe contains. Exemplary, d=1024, meansOne superframe includes 1024 frames.
In another possible embodiment, when the fourth information includes a frame number SFN of the frame in which the start time domain unit is located start time Subframe number Q of subframe in which the start time domain unit is located start time Time slot number G of time slot where time domain unit is located start time Symbol number (or index of symbol) B of time cell start time And determining the information of the starting time of the P first timer by the terminal equipment based on the fourth information and the information of the reference frame, wherein the information satisfies the following formula 4.4:
wherein SFN Reference to Frame number of reference frame indicated for the second indication information. The SFN is the frame number of the start timing of the P-th first timer. Q is the subframe number of the starting time of the P first timer. G is the index of the time slot corresponding to the starting time of the P first timer in one subframe. B is the symbol number of the starting time of the P first timer. SFN (SFN) start time Is the frame number of the starting time of the Mth first timer. Q (Q) start time Is the subframe number of the starting time of the Mth first timer. G start time And the index of the time slot corresponding to the starting time of the Mth first timer in one subframe. B (B) start time Is the symbol number of the starting time of the Mth first timer.Is the number of slots contained in one subframe. (N X T) DRX ) The first period is a unit of a subframe. T (T) DRX Representing the duration of one DRX cycle. Alternatively, the DRX cycle is a long DRX cycle (DRX-LongCycle). D is the number of frames that a superframe contains. Illustratively, d=1024, meaning that one superframe includes 1024 frames. H is the number of symbols contained in one slot. Illustratively, h=14, meaning that one slot includes 14 symbols. Exemplary, h=12, meaning that one slot includes 12 symbols。
In another possible embodiment, when the fourth information includes a frame number SFN of the frame in which the start time domain unit is located start time Time slot number A of time slot where time domain unit is located start time Symbol number (or index of symbol) B of time cell start time And determining the information of the starting time of the P first timer by the terminal equipment based on the fourth information and the information of the reference frame, wherein the information satisfies the following formula 4.5:
wherein SFN Reference to Frame number of reference frame indicated for the second indication information. The SFN is the frame number of the start timing of the P-th first timer. Q is the subframe number of the starting time of the P first timer. A is the index of the time slot corresponding to the starting time of the P first timer in a system frame. B is the symbol number of the starting time of the P first timer. SFN (SFN) start time Is the frame number of the starting time of the Mth first timer. Q (Q) start time Is the subframe number of the starting time of the Mth first timer. A is that start time And the index of the time slot corresponding to the starting time of the Mth first timer in one system frame. B (B) start time Is the symbol number of the starting time of the Mth first timer.Is the number of slots contained in one frame. (N X T) DRX ) The first period is a unit of a subframe. T (T) DRX Representing the duration of one DRX cycle. Alternatively, the DRX cycle is a long DRX cycle (DRX-LongCycle). D is the number of frames that a superframe contains. Illustratively, d=1024, meaning that one superframe includes 1024 frames. H is the number of symbols contained in one slot. Illustratively, h=14, meaning that one slot includes 14 symbols. Illustratively, h=12, meaning that one slot includes 12 symbols.
Optionally, when the value of the DRX cycle is an integer, the terminal device may determine the information of the start timing of the P-th first timer by using any one of the foregoing formulas 4.1, 4.2, 4.3, 4.4, and 4.5 based on the fourth information and the second indication information.
Note that, if the DRX cycle is a non-integer (e.g., 25/3ms, 50/3ms, 100/9ms, etc.), if N is equal to some value (e.g., 1, 2, 4, 5, etc.), the right of the equal sign is a non-integer, and the left of the equal sign can only be an integer, so that the information about the start timing of the P-th first timer cannot be determined. This can be solved by the following embodiments:
In another class of embodiments 2#, the following implementations are included:
in one possible implementation, when the fourth information includes an SFN start time And Q start time The terminal device uses the following equation 4.6:
[(SFN×10)+Q]=F{[(SFN reference to ×10)+(SFN start time ×10+Q start time )+N×T DRX ]mod (1024×10) }; (equation 4.6)
In another possible embodiment, when the fourth information includes an SFN start time 、Q start time G start time When the terminal device uses the following formula 4.7:
in another possible embodiment, when the fourth information includes an SFN start time And A start time The terminal device uses the following equation 4.8:
in another possible embodiment, when the fourth information includes an SFN start time 、Q start time 、G start time B, B start time When the terminal equipment is usedThe following formula 4.9:
in another possible embodiment, when the fourth information includes an SFN start time 、A start time B, B start time When the terminal device uses the following formula 4.10:
in another class of embodiments 3#, the following implementations are included:
in one possible implementation, when the fourth information includes an SFN start time And Q start time When the terminal device uses the following formula 4.11:
[(SFN×10)+Q]=F{[(SFN reference to ×10)+(SFN start time ×10+Q start time )+N×T DRX ]Mod (1024 x 10); or [ (SFN x 10) +Q]=[(SFN Reference to ×10)+(SFN start time ×10+Q start time )+F(N×T DRX )]mod (1024×10); (equation 4.11)
In another possible embodiment, when the fourth information includes an SFN start time 、Q start time G start time The terminal device uses the following equation 4.12:
In another possible embodiment, when the fourth information includes an SFN start time And A start time When the terminal device uses the following formula 4.13:
in another aspectIn a possible implementation, when the fourth information includes SFN start time 、Q start time 、G start time B, B start time The terminal device uses the following equation 4.14:
in another possible embodiment, when the fourth information includes an SFN start time 、A start time B, B start time When the terminal device uses the following formula 4.15:
in equations 4.6 to 4.15, F { } may represent a rounding operation. Illustratively, F { } may be a downward rounding operation, e.g., floor () function; or a round-up operation, e.g., ceil () function; it may also be a rounding operation, e.g. round () function. The meaning of the remaining parameters is referred to the corresponding related descriptions of formulas 4.1 to 4.5, and will not be repeated here.
Optionally, if the DRX cycle is a non-integer, the terminal device may determine the information of the start timing of the P-th first timer by using any one of the foregoing formulas 4.6, 4.7, 4.8, 4.9, 4.10, 4.11, 4.12, 4.13, 4.14, and 4.15 based on the fourth information and the second indication information.
In the formulas 4.6 to 4.15, when T DRX When the value of (2) is a non-integer, N×T DRX May be a non-integer. Because of the modulo operation, the right side of the equation is an integer, so that the right side of the equation is an integer, and the terminal equipment can calculate the signal of the starting time of the P first timerAnd (5) extinguishing.
Illustratively, taking equation 4.6 as an example, the values on both sides of the equal sign represent the number of subframes. Wherein [ (SFN x 10) +Q]The value of (2) indicates the number of subframes between the start position of the superframe where the P-th first timer is located and the start timing of the P-th first timer; (SFN) start time ×10+Q start time ) The value of (2) represents the number of subframes between the start position of the superframe where the mth first timer is located and the start timing of the mth first timer; N×T DRX The number of subframes included in N DRX cycles indicating an interval between the start timing of the mth first timer and the start timing of the P first timer. Wherein T is DRX In milliseconds (ms), since the duration of one subframe is 1ms, T DRX It can also be understood as the number of subframes that one DRX cycle contains. Taking DRX period of (25/3) ms as an example, T DRX = (25/3) ms, which means that one DRX cycle includes (25/3) subframes, and means that the duration of one DRX cycle is equal to (1/3) of the duration corresponding to 8 subframes plus the duration of one subframe, i.e., 8.3333ms. For example, SFN start time =0,Q start time =1,N=1,T DRX =(25/3)ms,SFN Reference to =512, [ (SFN) Reference to ×10)+(SFN start time ×10+Q start time )+N×T DRX ]=[512×10+1+1×(25/3)]mod(1024×10)=[5120+(28/3)]A sub-frame. If F is floor () function, F { [ (SFN) Reference to ×10)+(SFN start time ×10+Q start time )+N×T DRX ]mod(1024×10)}=floor{[5120+1+1×(25/3)]mod(1024×10)}=floor[5120+(28/3)]=5129 subframes, bringing into equation 4.6: [ (SFN×10) +Q]5129 subframes, and sfn=512, q=9. If F is the ceil () function, F { [ (SFN) Reference to ×10)+(SFN start time ×10+Q start time )+N×T DRX ]mod(1024×10)}=ceil{[5120+1+1×(25/3)]mod(1024×10)}=ceil[5120+(28/3)]=5130 subframes, bringing into equation 4.6: [ (SFN×10) +Q]5130 subframes, and sfn=513, q=0.
In addition, specific examples refer to the examples related to the foregoing formulas 3.6 to 3.15, and are not repeated here.
It should be understood that, when the DRX cycle is an integer, the terminal device may also determine the information of the start timing of the P-th first timer using equations 4.6 to 4.15. In this case, the values before and after the rounding operation are integers, and the values in the formula are not affected.
In addition, when the DRX cycle is a non-integer, the terminal device may determine the information of the start timing of the P-th first timer according to any one of the following formulas 4.16, 4.17, 4.18, 4.19, and 4.20 based on the fourth information and the second indication information.
In another class of embodiments 4#, the following implementations are included:
In one possible implementation, when the fourth information includes an SFN start time 、Q start time And R is start time The terminal device uses the following equation 4.16:
[(SFN×10)+Q+R]=[(SFN reference to ×10)+(SFN start time ×10+Q start time )+R start time +N×T DRX ]mod (1024×10); (equation 4.16)
R start time The content related to R is shown in formula 3.16, and will not be described here.
In another possible embodiment, when the fourth information includes an SFN start time 、Q start time 、G start time R is as follows start time The terminal device uses the following equation 4.17:
R start time the content related to R is shown in equation 3.17, and will not be described here.
In another possible embodiment, when the fourth information includes an SFN start time 、A start time And R is start time The terminal device uses the following equation 4.18:
R start time the content related to R is shown in equation 3.17, and will not be described here.
In another possible embodiment, when the fourth information includes an SFN start time 、Q start time 、G start time 、B start time R is as follows start time The terminal device uses the following equation 4.19:
R start time the content related to R is shown in equation 3.19, and will not be described here.
In another possible embodiment, when the fourth information includes an SFN start time 、A start time 、B start time R is as follows start time The terminal device uses the following equation 4.20:
R start time the content related to R is shown in equation 3.19, and will not be described here.
The meaning of the remaining parameters is referred to the corresponding related descriptions of formulas 3.1 to 3.5, and will not be repeated here.
Illustratively, taking equation 4.16 as an example, the values on both sides of the equal sign represent the number of subframes. [ (SFN×10) +Q+R]The value of (2) indicates the number of subframes between the start position of the superframe where the P-th first timer is located and the start timing of the P-th first timer. Wherein (((SFN x 10) +Q) represents an integer part of the number of subframes; r represents a fractional part of the number of subframes or is understood to be less than the duration of one subframe. (SFN) start time ×10+Q start time +R start time ) The value of (2) indicates the number of subframes between the start position of the superframe where the mth first timer is located and the start timing of the mth first timer. Wherein (((SFN) start time ×10)+Q start time ) An integer part representing the number of subframes; r is R start time A fractional part representing the number of subframes, or understood to be less than the duration of one subframe. N×T DRX The number of subframes included in N DRX cycles indicating an interval between the start timing of the mth first timer and the start timing of the P first timer. Wherein T is DRX In milliseconds (ms), since the duration of one subframe is 1ms, T DRX It can also be understood as the number of subframes that one DRX cycle contains. Taking DRX period of (25/3) ms as an example, T DRX = (25/3) ms, which means that one DRX cycle includes (25/3) subframes, the duration of the DRX cycle is equal to (1/3) of the duration corresponding to 8 subframes plus the duration of one subframe, i.e., 8.3333ms. For example, SFN start time =0,Q start time =1,R start time =0,N=1,T DRX =(25/3)ms,SFN Reference to =512, [ (SFN) Reference to ×10)+(SFN start time ×10+Q start time +R start time )+N×T DRX ]mod(1024×10)=[5120+1+1×(25/3)]mod(1024×10)=[5120+(28/3)]A sub-frame. The substitution into equation 4.16 yields: [ (SFN×10) +Q+R]=[5120+(28/3)]The number of subframes, and hence sfn=512, q= 9,R = (1/3).
In another class of embodiment 5#, the fourth information received by the terminal device may not include R start time . The method specifically comprises the following implementation modes:
in one possible implementation, when the fourth information includes an SFN start time And Q start time When the terminal device uses the following formula 4.21:
[(SFN×10)+Q+R]=[(SFN reference to ×10)+(SFN start time ×10+Q start time )+N×T DRX ]mod (1024×10); (equation 4.21)
R start time For the content related to R please refer to the content in equation 3.16,and will not be described in detail herein.
In another possible embodiment, when the fourth information includes an SFN start time 、Q start time And G start time The terminal device uses the following equation 4.22:
R start time the content related to R is shown in equation 3.17, and will not be described here.
In another possible embodiment, when the fourth information includes an SFN start time And A start time When the terminal device uses the following formula 4.23:
R start time the content related to R is shown in equation 3.17, and will not be described here.
In another possible embodiment, when the fourth information includes an SFN start time 、Q start time 、G start time And B start time The terminal device uses the following equation 4.24:
R start time the content related to R is shown in equation 3.19, and will not be described here.
In another possible embodiment, when the fourth information includes an SFN start time 、A start time And B start time The terminal device uses the following equation 4.25:
R start time the content related to R is shown in equation 3.19, and will not be described here.
Alternatively, the equations in equations 4.1 to 4.25 for expressing the number of time domain units between the start position of the superframe where the mth first timer is located and the start timing of the mth first timer may be expressed by one parameter. Alternatively, the first number in equations 4.1 through 4.25 may be represented by a parameter.
Exemplary, W can be used start time Indicating the number of subframes between the start position of the superframe where the Mth first timer is located and the start time of the Mth first timer, or W may be used start time Representing a first number.
For example, (SFN) in equations 4.1, 4.6, 4.11 and 4.21 start time ×10+Q start time ) Can be replaced by W start time . Alternatively, W start time The value of (2) is an integer. For example, [ (SFN X10) +Q]=[(SFN Reference to ×10)+W start time +N×T DRX ]mod (Dx 10) (equation 4.1.1). For example, [ (SFN X10) +Q]=F{[(SFN Reference to ×10)+W start time +N×T DRX ]mod (1024×10) } (equation 4.6.1). For example, [ (SFN X10) +Q]=F{[(SFN Reference to ×10)+W start time +N×T DRX ]Mod (1024 x 10); or [ (SFN x 10) +Q]=[(SFN Reference to ×10)+W start time +F(N×T DRX )]mod (1024×10); (equation 4.11.1). For example, [ (SFN×10) +Q+R ]=[(SFN Reference to ×10)+W start time +N×T DRX ]mod (1024×10) (formula 4.21.1). For example, the network device configures only one parameter W when configuring the start opportunity indicating the mth first timer for the terminal device start time Rather than configuring an SFN start time And Q start time These two parameters.
Also for example, (SFN) in equation 4.16 start time ×10+Q start time )+R start time Can be replaced by W start time . Alternatively, W start time Is a non-integer or integer.For example, [ (SFN×10) +Q+R]=[(SFN Reference to ×10)+W start time +N×T DRX ]mod (1024×10) (formula 4.16.1). For example, the network device configures only one parameter W when configuring the start opportunity indicating the mth first timer for the terminal device start time Rather than configuring an SFN start time 、Q start time And R is start time These three parameters.
Exemplary, U can be employed start time Indicating the number of time slots between the start position of the superframe where the Mth first timer is located and the start time of the Mth first timer, or U can be adopted start time Representing a first number.
For example, in equations 4.2, 4.7, 4.12 and 4.22 Can be replaced by U start time . Optionally, U start time The value of (2) is an integer. For example, a-> For example, a-> For example, the number of the cells to be processed, or alternatively, the first and second heat exchangers may be, for example, the number of the cells to be processed, for example, the network device configures only one parameter U when configuring the start opportunity indicating the mth first timer for the terminal device start time Rather than configuring an SFN start time 、Q start time And G start time These three parameters.
Also for example, in equation 4.17Can be replaced by U start time . Optionally, U start time Is a non-integer or integer. For example, the number of the cells to be processed, for example, the network device configures only one parameter U when configuring the start opportunity indicating the mth first timer for the terminal device start time Rather than configuring an SFN start time 、Q start time 、G start time And R is start time These four parameters.
Also for example, in equations 4.3, 4.8, 4.13 and 4.23Can be used forReplaced by U start time . Optionally, U start time The value of (2) is an integer. For example, a-> For example, the number of the cells to be processed, for example, a-> Or (I)> For example, the number of the cells to be processed, for example, the network device configures only one parameter U when configuring the start opportunity indicating the mth first timer for the terminal device start time Rather than configuring an SFN start time And A start time These two parameters.
Also for example, in equation 4.18Can be replaced by U start time . Optionally, U start time Is a non-integer or integer. For example, the number of the cells to be processed, for example, the network device configures only one parameter U when configuring the start opportunity indicating the mth first timer for the terminal device start time Rather than configuring an SFN start time 、A start time And R is start time These three parameters.
For example, V may be employed start time Indicating the number of symbols between the start position of the superframe where the Mth first timer is located and the start time of the Mth first timer, or may adopt V start time Representing a first number.
For example, in equations 4.4, 4.9, 4.14 and 4.24 Can be replaced by V start time . Alternatively, V start time The value of (2) is an integer. For example, a-> For example, the number of the cells to be processed, for example, Or (I)> For example, the number of the cells to be processed, for example, the network device configures only one parameter V when configuring the start timing indicating the mth first timer for the terminal device start time Rather than configuring an SFN start time 、Q start time 、G start time And B start time These four parameters.
Also for example, in equation 4.19 Can be replaced by V start time . Alternatively, V start time Is a non-integer or integer. For example, a-> For example, the network device configures only one parameter V when configuring the start timing indicating the mth first timer for the terminal device start time Rather than configuring an SFN start time 、Q start time 、G start time 、B start time And R is start time These five parameters.
Also for example, in equations 4.5, 4.10, 4.15 and 4.25 Can be replaced by V start time . Alternatively, V start time The value of (2) is an integer. For example, a-> For example, a-> For example, the number of the cells to be processed, or (I)> For example, the number of the cells to be processed, for example, the network device configures only one parameter V when configuring the start timing indicating the mth first timer for the terminal device start time Rather than configuring an SFN start time 、A start time And B start time These three parameters.
Also for example, in equation 4.20Can be replaced by V start time . Alternatively, V start time Is a non-integer or integer. For example, the number of the cells to be processed, for example, the network device configures only one parameter V when configuring the start timing indicating the mth first timer for the terminal device start time Rather than configuring an SFN start time 、A start time 、B start time And R is start time These four parameters.
The number of slots included in one frame is not limited to 10, and may be other values, and 10 may be replaced with K.
It should be noted that P-M may be replaced by P. For example, regardless of the value of M, N is equal to P.
It should be noted that the information of the reference frame in step 1004 may replace the information of the frame number, SFN Reference to Can replace SFN Quantity of . Wherein SFN Quantity of For the second indicationNumber of frames indicated by the message.
In step 1005, the terminal device starts the first timer based on the information of the start timing of the P-th first timer.
Step 1005 is an optional step. The details of step 1005 may refer to the description in step 603, and will not be described here.
Optionally, the present application may further include: the terminal equipment determines the information of the starting time of the P+1st first timer based on the information of the starting time of the P first timer.
The content related to the information of the start timing of the p+1st first timer, which is determined by the terminal device based on the information of the start timing of the P first timer, may be described in the embodiment of fig. 6, and will not be described herein.
In this embodiment, the terminal device may determine, based on the fourth information and the at least one DRX cycle, a start timing of the first timer after the at least one DRX cycle from the starting time domain unit on the basis of a reference frame indicated by the information of the reference frame. Because the mode of the terminal equipment for calculating the starting time of the first timer does not need to be recalculated when the superframe is crossed, the superframe where the moment of sending the DRX configuration by the network equipment is positioned is aligned with the superframe where the moment of acquiring the DRX configuration by the terminal equipment, and the DRX of the network equipment and the terminal equipment is aligned. Or the DRX cycle is matched with the service cycle or the DRX and the service are matched, so that the power consumption of the terminal equipment is reduced, and/or the time delay of the terminal equipment for receiving data is reduced.
It should be noted that, in the embodiment corresponding to fig. 6 and/or fig. 10, the unit of the first period is a subframe, which may also be understood as one or more of the following: the first period is in milliseconds, T DRX Is in subframes, T DRX In milliseconds.
In the embodiment corresponding to fig. 6 and/or fig. 10, the unit of the first period is taken as an example of a subframe, and the unit of the first period may be of other granularity (for example, a slot, a symbol, a frame, a millisecond, etc.), which is not limited by the present application. Taking into account the first period The unit may influence the formula (e.g., formula 3.1, formula 3.2, formula 3.3, formula 3.4, formula 3.5, formula 4.1, formula 4.2, formula 4.3, formula 4.4, formula 4.5) of the information determining the start timing of the P-th first timer, if the first period and/or T DRX The unit of (2) is granularity other than the subframe, and unit conversion is required. For example, the unit conversion is performed such that the unit of the cumulative sum of (P-M) DRX cycles is the same as the granularity of the time domain unit corresponding to the start timing of the P-th first timer or the granularity of the time domain unit corresponding to the start timing of the M-th first timer.
For example, if the first period and/or T DRX Is in frames: one or more of the following conversions may be performed:
n×t in equation 3.1 and/or equation 4.1 DRX Can be converted into NxT DRX ×10;
In equation 3.2 and/or equation 4.2Can be converted into->
In equation 3.3 and/or equation 4.3Can be converted into->
In equation 3.4 and/or equation 4.4Can be converted into
In equation 3.5 and/or equation 4.5Can be converted into
The first period and/or T DRX The unit of (2) is other granularity, similar to the above, and will not be described again.
It should be understood that the above-described different communication methods or related descriptions of the same information or corresponding information in different steps, different locations, or different embodiments of the same communication method may be referred to each other.
The modulo arithmetic according to the present application is variously modified. Illustratively, a=bmod c can be modified to b=θ×c+a, where θ is an integer greater than or equal to 0. For example, equation 3.1 may be modified as: [ (SFN) start time ×10+Q start time )+N×T DRX ]=θ×(D×10)+[(SFN×10)+Q]. For another example, equation 3.16 may be modified as: [ (SFN) start time ×10+Q start time +R start time )+N×T DRX ]=θ×(1024×10)+[(SFN×10)+Q+R]. And so on, are not listed here.
The rounding operation according to the present application is variously modified. Illustratively, an integer +F (a non-integer) can be modified to: f (an integer + a non-integer), where F () is a rounding operation. For example, equation 3.6[ (SFN×10) +Q]=F{[(SFN start time ×10+Q start time )+N×T DRX ]mod (1024×10) } can be modified as: equation 3.16[ (SFN x 10) +Q]=F{[(SFN start time ×10+Q start time )+N×T DRX ]Mod (1024X 10), or [ (SFN X10) +Q)]=[(SFN start time ×10+Q start time )+F(N×T DRX )]mod (1024×10). And so on, are not listed here.
It should be understood that the conventional technology may change with the evolution of the technical scheme, and the technical scheme provided by the present application is not limited to the provided conventional technology.
It should be noted that different embodiments of the present application or some steps (e.g., any one or more steps) of different embodiments may be combined with each other to form a new embodiment. It should be noted that, some steps (for example, any one or more steps) in different embodiments may include optional steps in a certain embodiment, may also include optional steps in a certain embodiment, and may also include optional steps and optional steps in a certain embodiment, which is not limited by the present application.
It is noted that terms and/or descriptions between the various embodiments are consistent and may be referred to each other if not specifically stated or logically conflicting.
It should be noted that the sequence of the steps in the embodiment of the present application is not limited by the present application.
In the present application, "post", "time", and the like are not strictly limited to time points.
The start timing of the first timer according to the present application may be understood as/include information on the start timing of the first timer or information on the start timing of the first timer. For example, the start timing of the mth first timer may include information of the start timing of the mth first timer or information related to the start timing of the mth first timer, and the specific start time of the mth first timer is not limited. For example, the start timing of the P first timer may include information of the start timing of the P first timer or information related to the start timing of the P first timer, and the specific start time of the P first timer is not limited. For example, reference may be made to the contents of step 603 and/or step 1004.
It should be noted that the sequence of the steps in the embodiment of the present application is not limited by the present application.
As shown in fig. 12, a schematic structural diagram of a communication device 120 according to the present embodiment is provided. It should be understood that the network device in the foregoing method embodiments corresponding to fig. 2, 3, 5, 6, 9 or 10 may be based on the structure of the communication apparatus 120 shown in fig. 12 in this embodiment. Alternatively, the network device may be an access network device.
The communication device 120 includes at least one processor 1201, at least one memory 1202, at least one transceiver 1203, at least one network interface 1205, and one or more antennas 1204. The processor 1201, the memory 1202, the transceiver 1203 and the network interface 1205 are connected by connection means, and the antenna 1204 is connected to the transceiver 1203. The connection device may include various interfaces, transmission lines, buses, and the like, which are not limited in this embodiment.
The memory 1202 is mainly used for storing software programs and data. The memory 1202 may be separate and coupled to the processor 1201. Alternatively, the memory 1202 may be integrated with the processor 1201, for example within one or more chips. The memory 1202 is capable of storing program codes for implementing the technical solutions of the embodiments of the present application, and is controlled to be executed by the processor 1201, and various types of computer program codes executed may be regarded as drivers of the processor 1201. It should be understood that fig. 12 in the present embodiment only shows one memory and one processor, but in practical application, the communication device 120 may have a plurality of processors or a plurality of memories, which is not limited herein. Further, the memory 1202 may also be referred to as a storage medium or a storage device or the like. Memory 1202 may be a memory element on the same chip as the processor (i.e., an on-chip memory element) or a separate memory element, as embodiments of the present application are not limited in this respect.
In this embodiment, the transceiver 1203 may be configured to support reception or transmission of radio frequency signals between the communication device 120 and the terminal device, and the transceiver 1203 may be connected to the antenna 1204. The transceiver 1203 includes a transmitter Tx and a receiver Rx. Specifically, the one or more antennas 1204 may receive radio frequency signals, and the receiver Rx of the transceiver 1203 is configured to receive the radio frequency signals from the antennas 1204, convert the radio frequency signals into digital baseband signals or digital intermediate frequency signals, and provide the digital baseband signals or digital intermediate frequency signals to the processor 1201, so that the processor 1201 performs further processing, such as demodulation processing and decoding processing, on the digital baseband signals or digital intermediate frequency signals. The transmitter Tx in the transceiver 1203 is also configured to receive a modulated digital baseband signal or digital intermediate frequency signal from the processor 1201, convert the modulated digital baseband signal or digital intermediate frequency signal to a radio frequency signal, and transmit the radio frequency signal via the one or more antennas 1204. Specifically, the receiver Rx may selectively perform one or more steps of down-mixing processing and analog-to-digital conversion processing on the radio frequency signal to obtain a digital baseband signal or a digital intermediate frequency signal, where the order of the down-mixing processing and the analog-to-digital conversion processing is adjustable. The transmitter Tx may selectively perform one or more stages of up-mixing processing and digital-to-analog conversion processing on the modulated digital baseband signal or the digital intermediate frequency signal to obtain a radio frequency signal, and the sequence of the up-mixing processing and the digital-to-analog conversion processing may be adjustable. The digital baseband signal and the digital intermediate frequency signal may be collectively referred to as a digital signal.
It should be appreciated that the aforementioned transceiver 1203 may also be referred to as a transceiver unit, transceiver device, etc. Alternatively, a device for implementing a receiving function in the transceiver unit may be regarded as a receiving unit, and a device for implementing a transmitting function in the transceiver unit may be regarded as a transmitting unit, that is, the transceiver unit includes a receiving unit and a transmitting unit, where the receiving unit may also be referred to as a receiver, an input port, a receiving circuit, etc., and the transmitting unit may be referred to as a transmitter, or a transmitting circuit, etc.
Further, the foregoing processor 1201 is mainly used to process communication protocols and communication data, and control the entire network device, execute software programs, and process data of the software programs, for example, to support the communication apparatus 120 to perform the actions described in the foregoing embodiments. The communication device 120 may include a baseband processor that is mainly used to process the communication protocol and the communication data, and a central processor that is mainly used to control the entire communication device 120, execute a software program, and process the data of the software program. As the processor 1201 in fig. 12 may integrate the functions of a baseband processor and a central processor, those skilled in the art will appreciate that the baseband processor and the central processor may also be separate processors, interconnected by bus technology, etc. Those skilled in the art will appreciate that the communication device 120 may include multiple baseband processors to accommodate different network formats, and that the communication device 120 may include multiple central processors to enhance its processing capabilities, and that the various components of the communication device 120 may be connected by various buses. The baseband processor may also be expressed as a baseband processing circuit or a baseband processing chip. The central processing unit may also be expressed as a central processing circuit or a central processing chip. The function of processing the communication protocol and the communication data may be built in the processor, or may be stored in a memory in the form of a software program, which is executed by the processor to realize the baseband processing function.
In addition, the aforementioned network interface 1205 is used to enable the communication device 120 to connect to other communication devices via a communication link. In particular, the network interface 1205 may include a network interface between the communication device 120 and a core network element, such as an S1 interface; the network interface 1205 may also include a network interface, such as an X2 or Xn interface, between the communication device 120 and other network equipment, such as other access network equipment or core network elements.
In a possible implementation, the communication device 120 is configured to perform the method in the corresponding embodiment of fig. 3, fig. 5 or fig. 9. Specifically, in the communication device 120, the processor 1201 is configured to determine first information, which is different from second information, for determining a start timing of a first timer in a first superframe, and second information for determining a start timing of a first timer in a second superframe. The transceiver 1203 is configured to send the first information to the terminal device. Optionally, the first timer is a discontinuous reception (drx-onduration timer).
Optionally, the first information and the second information are different values of the same parameter.
In a possible implementation, the transceiver 1203 is further configured to send third information to the terminal device, where the third information is used by the terminal device to determine the first information. Optionally, the third information is carried in DCI, MAC CE or RRC signaling.
Optionally, the first information is a first offset, and a duration indicated by the first offset is smaller than the DRX cycle.
In one possible embodiment, the first information is a first parameter, which is drx-StartOffset.
In a possible implementation, the transceiver 1203 is further configured to send first indication information to the terminal device, where the first indication information is used to determine an index of the first superframe.
In one possible implementation, the first indication information is used to instruct the network device to transmit the DRX configuration in the second half of the superframes, or the first indication information is used to instruct the network device to transmit the DRX configuration in the first half of the superframes.
Optionally, the first indication information is information of a reference frame.
Optionally, the value of the first indication information is 512 or 0.
Optionally, the first superframe is a superframe where a terminal device obtains the DRX configuration.
Specifically, the communication device 120 is configured to perform the method of the network apparatus in the corresponding embodiment of fig. 6 or fig. 10. The processor 1201 in the communication apparatus 120 is configured to obtain fourth information, where the fourth information includes information of a start timing of the mth first timer, and M is an integer greater than or equal to 0. And a transceiver 1203 configured to send fourth information to the terminal device, where the fourth information is used by the terminal device to determine information of a start timing of the P-th first timer based on the fourth information, where P is an integer greater than 0, and P is greater than M.
Optionally, the first timer is a discontinuous reception (drx-onduration timer).
In one possible embodiment, the information of the start timing of the mth first timer includes information of the following time domain units: frames and subframes; or, frames, subframes, and slots; or a frame, a subframe, a slot, and a symbol.
In one possible embodiment, the information of the start opportunity of the P-th first timer includes information of the following time domain units: frames and subframes; or, frames, subframes, and slots; or a frame, a subframe, a slot, and a symbol.
In a possible implementation manner, the transceiver 1203 is further configured to send second indication information to the terminal device, where the second indication information is used to indicate information of a reference frame, and the information of the reference frame is used to determine information of a start timing of the first timer.
Optionally, the frame number of the reference frame is 512 or 0.
It should be noted that, the specific implementation and the beneficial effects of the present embodiment may refer to the method of the network device in the foregoing embodiment, which is not described herein again.
As shown in fig. 13, another communication device 130 according to this embodiment is shown. It should be understood that the terminal device in the foregoing method embodiment corresponding to fig. 2, 3, 5, 6, 9 or 10 may be based on the structure of the communication apparatus 130 shown in fig. 13 in this embodiment.
The communication device 130 includes at least one processor 1301, at least one memory 1302, and at least one transceiver 1303. Wherein the processor 1301, the memory 1302 and the transceiver 1303 are connected. Optionally, the communications apparatus 130 can also include an input device 1305, an output device 1306, and one or more antennas 1304. The antenna 1304 is connected to the transceiver 1303, and the input device 1305 and the output device 1306 are connected to the processor 1301.
In this embodiment, the memory 1302 is mainly used for storing software programs and data. The memory 1302 may be separate and coupled to the processor 1301. Alternatively, the memory 1302 may be integrated with the processor 1301, for example within one or more chips. The memory 1302 is capable of storing program codes for implementing the technical solution of the embodiment of the present application, and is controlled to be executed by the processor 1301, and various types of computer program codes executed may be regarded as drivers of the processor 1301. It should be understood that fig. 13 in this embodiment only shows one memory and one processor, but in practical application, the communication device 130 may have a plurality of processors or a plurality of memories, which is not limited herein. Further, the memory 1302 may also be referred to as a storage medium or a storage device or the like. Memory 1302 may be a memory element on the same chip as the processor (i.e., an on-chip memory element) or a separate memory element, as embodiments of the present application are not limited in this respect.
In this embodiment, the transceiver 1303 may be used to support reception or transmission of radio frequency signals between the communication apparatus 130 and the access network device, and the transceiver 1303 may be connected to the antenna 1304. The transceiver 1303 includes a transmitter Tx and a receiver Rx. Specifically, the one or more antennas 1304 may receive radio frequency signals, and the receiver Rx of the transceiver 1303 is configured to receive the radio frequency signals from the antennas 1304, convert the radio frequency signals into digital baseband signals or digital intermediate frequency signals, and provide the digital baseband signals or digital intermediate frequency signals to the processor 1301, so that the processor 1301 may perform further processing, such as demodulation processing and decoding processing, on the digital baseband signals or digital intermediate frequency signals. The transmitter Tx in the transceiver 1303 is also configured to receive a modulated digital baseband signal or a digital intermediate frequency signal from the processor 1301, convert the modulated digital baseband signal or digital intermediate frequency signal into a radio frequency signal, and transmit the radio frequency signal through the one or more antennas 1304. Specifically, the receiver Rx may selectively perform one or more steps of down-mixing processing and analog-to-digital conversion processing on the radio frequency signal to obtain a digital baseband signal or a digital intermediate frequency signal, where the order of the down-mixing processing and the analog-to-digital conversion processing is adjustable. The transmitter Tx may selectively perform one or more stages of up-mixing processing and digital-to-analog conversion processing on the modulated digital baseband signal or the digital intermediate frequency signal to obtain a radio frequency signal, and the sequence of the up-mixing processing and the digital-to-analog conversion processing may be adjustable. The digital baseband signal and the digital intermediate frequency signal may be collectively referred to as a digital signal.
It should be appreciated that the aforementioned transceiver 1303 may also be referred to as a transceiver unit, transceiver device, etc. Alternatively, a device for implementing a receiving function in the transceiver unit may be regarded as a receiving unit, and a device for implementing a transmitting function in the transceiver unit may be regarded as a transmitting unit, that is, the transceiver unit includes a receiving unit and a transmitting unit, where the receiving unit may also be referred to as a receiver, an input port, a receiving circuit, etc., and the transmitting unit may be referred to as a transmitter, or a transmitting circuit, etc.
Processor 1301 may be a baseband processor or a central processing unit (central processing unit, CPU), which may be integrated together or separate. Processor 1301 may be used to implement various functions for the terminal device, for example, to process communication protocols and communication data, or to control the entire terminal device, execute software programs, and process data of the software programs; or to assist in completing computational processing tasks such as processing graphics images or audio, etc.; or processor 1301 may be configured to implement one or more of the functions described above.
In addition, the output device 1306 communicates with the processor 1301 and may display information in a variety of ways, particularly without limitation.
Specifically, the communication device 130 is configured to perform the method of the terminal device in the corresponding embodiment of fig. 2, fig. 3, fig. 5, or fig. 9. The processor 1301 in the communication apparatus 130 is configured to determine a start timing of the first timer in the first superframe based on the first information. The first information is different from the second information, the first information is used for determining the starting time of the first timer in the first superframe, and the second information is used for determining the starting time of the first timer in the second superframe. Optionally, the first timer is a discontinuous reception continuous timer.
In one possible implementation, processor 1301 in communication apparatus 130 obtains the first information based on a rule predefined by the protocol.
In a possible implementation, the communication device 130 further includes a transceiver 1303, where the transceiver 1303 is configured to obtain the first information. Illustratively, the communication device 130 receives the first information from other communication devices (e.g., network equipment) via the transceiver 1303.
Optionally, the first information and the second information are different values of the same parameter.
Optionally, in a superframe period, the first superframe and the second superframe satisfy the following conditions: the first superframe is adjacent to the second superframe; or, the first superframe is separated from the second superframe by at least one superframe; wherein one superframe period includes at least two superframes.
In one possible implementation, the processor 1301 is specifically configured to determine the first information based on the third information. Wherein the third information is determined by the terminal device based on the index of the first superframe; alternatively, the third information is from the network device.
Optionally, the third information is determined by the terminal device based on the index of the first superframe and N, where N is the number of superframes included in the superframe period, and N is an integer greater than 1.
Optionally, third information C 1 Index S of first superframe 1 The following conditions are satisfied with N: c (C) 1 =S 1 mod N。
Optionally, N satisfies the following condition: the superframe period is equal to an integer multiple of the discontinuous reception DRX period corresponding to the first timer.
In one possible implementation, the first information is a first offset, and the duration indicated by the first offset is less than the DRX cycle.
In one possible implementation, the processor 1301 is specifically configured to determine a start timing of the first timer in the first superframe based on the first information and a first parameter, where the first parameter is drx-StartOffset.
In one possible implementation, the processor 1301 is specifically configured to determine, based on the second parameter and the first information, a start timing of the first timer in the first superframe; or determining a first reference value based on the first parameter and the second parameter, and determining the starting time of the first timer in the first superframe by the terminal equipment based on the first reference value and the first information; the first parameter is drx-StartOffset, and the second parameter is drx-SlotOffset.
In one possible implementation, the first information is a first parameter. Illustratively, the first parameter is drx-StartOffset.
In one possible implementation, processor 1301 is specifically configured to: determining an index of the first superframe according to the first indication information; or determining an index of the first superframe according to the first indication information and the first time information;
wherein the first indication information is from the network device, and the first time information includes information of a time when the terminal device acquires the DRX configuration.
In one possible implementation, the transceiver 1303 is further configured to receive first indication information from a network device, where the first indication information is used to determine an index of a first superframe.
Optionally, the first indication information is used to instruct the network device to send the DRX configuration in the second half of the superframes in one superframe, or the first indication information is used to instruct the network device to send the DRX configuration in the first half of the superframes in one superframe.
Optionally, the first superframe is a superframe where a terminal device obtains the DRX configuration.
In one possible implementation, the processor 1301 determines that the index of the first superframe is (l+1) when the first indication information indicates that the network device transmits the DRX configuration in the second half of the superframes, and the timing at which the communication apparatus 130 acquires the DRX configuration is in the first half of the first superframe. Wherein L is greater than or equal to 0.
In one possible implementation, the processor 1301 determines that the index of the first superframe is L when the timing at which the communication apparatus 130 acquires the DRX configuration is within the second half of the first superframe. Wherein L is greater than or equal to 0.
In one possible implementation, when the first indication information indicates that the network device transmits the DRX configuration in the first half of the superframe, the processor 1301 determines that the index of the first superframe is L. Wherein L is greater than or equal to 0.
Specifically, the communication device 130 is configured to perform the method of the terminal device in the corresponding embodiment of fig. 6 or fig. 10. The processor 1301 in the communication apparatus 130 is configured to acquire fourth information, and determine information of a start timing of the P-th first timer based on the fourth information, where the fourth information includes information of a start timing of the M-th first timer, M is an integer greater than or equal to 0, P is an integer greater than 0, and P is greater than M.
In one possible embodiment, the information of the start timing of the mth first timer includes information of the following time domain units: frames and subframes; or, frames, subframes, and slots; or a frame, a subframe, a slot, and a symbol.
In one possible embodiment, the information of the start opportunity of the P-th first timer includes information of the following time domain units: frames and subframes; or, frames, subframes, and slots; or a frame, a subframe, a slot, and a symbol.
In one possible implementation, the processor 1301 is specifically configured to determine the information of the start timing of the P-th first timer based on the fourth information and the first period, where the first period is equal to the cumulative sum of (P-M) DRX cycles.
In one possible implementation, processor 1301 determines the start timing of the P first timer according to the following condition: the remainder of dividing the sum of the first number and the cumulative sum of (P-M) DRX cycles by the second number is equal to the third number.
The first number is the number of time domain units between the starting position of the superframe where the Mth first timer is located and the starting time of the Mth first timer; the second number is the number of time domain units contained in one superframe; the third number is the number of time domain units between the start position of the superframe where the P first timer is located and the start time of the P first timer.
In one possible implementation, processor 1301 is specifically configured to: determining a first number and a second number based on the fourth information; determining a remainder of dividing a sum of the first number and a cumulative sum of (P-M) DRX cycles by the second number to obtain a third number; the start time related information of the first timer in the P-th DRX cycle is determined based on the third number.
In a possible embodiment, when the fourth information includes a frame number SFN of the frame in which the start time domain unit is located start time And the subframe number Q of the starting time domain unit start time When, processor 1301 determines, based on the fourth information, information of the start timing of the P-th first timer, satisfying the following formula 3.1:
[(SFN×10)+Q]=[(SFN start time ×10+Q start time )+N×T DRX ]mod (d×10); (equation 3.1)
The SFN is the frame number of the starting time of the P first timer. Q is the subframe number of the starting time of the P first timer. SFN (SFN) start time Is the frame number of the starting time of the Mth first timer. Q (Q) start time Is the subframe number of the starting time of the Mth first timer. (N X T) DRX ) The first period is a unit of a subframe. T (T) DRX Representing the duration of one DRX cycle. Alternatively, the DRX cycle is a long DRX cycle (DRX-LongCycle). D is the number of frames that a superframe contains. Illustratively, d=1024, meaning that one superframe includes 1024 frames.
In another possible embodiment, when the fourth information includes a frame number SFN of the frame in which the start time domain unit is located start time Subframe number Q of subframe in which the start time domain unit is located start time Time slot number G of time domain unit start time When, processor 1301 determines, based on the fourth information, information of the start timing of the P-th first timer, satisfying the following formula 3.2:
The SFN is the frame number of the starting time of the P first timer. Q is the subframe number of the starting time of the P first timer. G is the index of the time slot corresponding to the starting time of the P first timer in one subframe. SFN (SFN) start time Is the frame number of the starting time of the Mth first timer. Q (Q) start time Is the subframe number of the starting time of the Mth first timer. G start time And the index of the time slot corresponding to the starting time of the Mth first timer in one subframe.Is the number of slots contained in one subframe. (N X T) DRX ) The first period is a unit of a subframe. T (T) DRX Representing a DRX cycleIs a time period of (2). Alternatively, the DRX cycle is a long DRX cycle (DRX-LongCycle). D is the number of frames that a superframe contains. Illustratively, d=1024, meaning that one superframe includes 1024 frames.
In another possible embodiment, when the fourth information includes a frame number SFN of the frame in which the start time domain unit is located start time And time slot number A of time domain unit start time When, processor 1301 determines, based on the fourth information, information of the start timing of the P-th first timer, satisfying the following formula 3.3:
the SFN is the frame number of the starting time of the P first timer. Q is the subframe number of the starting time of the P first timer. A is the index of the time slot corresponding to the starting time of the P first timer in a system frame. SFN (SFN) start time Is the frame number of the starting time of the Mth first timer. Q (Q) start time Is the subframe number of the starting time of the Mth first timer. A is that start time And the index of the time slot corresponding to the starting time of the Mth first timer in one system frame.Is the number of slots contained in one subframe. (N X T) DRX ) The first period is a unit of a subframe. T (T) DRX Representing the duration of one DRX cycle. Alternatively, the DRX cycle is a long DRX cycle (DRX-LongCycle). D is the number of frames that a superframe contains. Illustratively, d=1024, meaning that one superframe includes 1024 frames.
In another possible embodiment, when the fourth information includes a frame number SFN of the frame in which the start time domain unit is located start time Subframe number Q of subframe in which the start time domain unit is located start time Time slot number G of time slot where time domain unit is located start time Symbol number (or index of symbol) B of time cell start time Processor 1301 then determines the P-th based on the fourth informationThe information of the start timing of the first timer satisfies the following formula 3.4:
the SFN is the frame number of the starting time of the P first timer. Q is the subframe number of the starting time of the P first timer. G is the index of the time slot corresponding to the starting time of the P first timer in one subframe. B is the symbol number of the starting time of the P first timer. SFN (SFN) start time Is the frame number of the starting time of the Mth first timer. Q (Q) start time Is the subframe number of the starting time of the Mth first timer. G start time And the index of the time slot corresponding to the starting time of the Mth first timer in one subframe. B (B) start time Is the symbol number of the starting time of the Mth first timer.Is the number of slots contained in one subframe.Is the number of slots contained in one frame. (N X T) DRX ) The first period is a unit of a subframe. T (T) DRX Representing the duration of one DRX cycle. Alternatively, the DRX cycle is a long DRX cycle (DRX-LongCycle). D is the number of frames that a superframe contains. Illustratively, d=1024, meaning that one superframe includes 1024 frames. H is the number of symbols contained in one slot. Illustratively, h=14, meaning that one slot includes 14 symbols. Illustratively, h=12, meaning that one slot includes 12 symbols.
In another possible embodiment, when the fourth information includes a frame number SFN of the frame in which the start time domain unit is located start time Time slot number A of time domain unit start time Symbol of time domain unitNumber (or index of symbol) B start time When the processor 1301 determines the information of the start timing of the P-th first timer based on the fourth information, the following formula 3.5 is satisfied:
The SFN is the frame number of the starting time of the P first timer. Q is the subframe number of the starting time of the P first timer. A is the index of the time slot corresponding to the starting time of the P first timer in a system frame. B is the symbol number of the starting time of the P first timer. SFN (SFN) start time Is the frame number of the starting time of the Mth first timer. Q (Q) start time Is the subframe number of the starting time of the Mth first timer. A is that start time And the index of the time slot corresponding to the starting time of the Mth first timer in one system frame. B (B) start time Is the symbol number of the starting time of the Mth first timer.Is the number of slots contained in one subframe.Is the number of slots contained in one frame. (N X T) DRX ) The first period is a unit of a subframe. T (T) DRX Representing the duration of one DRX cycle. Alternatively, the DRX cycle is a long DRX cycle (DRX-LongCycle). D is the number of frames that a superframe contains. Illustratively, d=1024, meaning that one superframe includes 1024 frames. H is the number of symbols contained in one slot. Illustratively, h=14, meaning that one slot includes 14 symbols. Illustratively, h=12, meaning that one slot includes 12 symbols.
In one possible implementation, when the fourth information includes an SFN start time And Q start time When processor 1301 determines the information of the start timing of the P-th first timer using the following equation 3.6:
[(SFN×10)+Q]=F{[(SFN start time ×10+Q start time )+N×T DRX ]mod (1024×10) }; (equation 3.6)
In another possible embodiment, when the fourth information includes an SFN start time 、Q start time G start time When processor 1301 determines the information of the start timing of the P-th first timer using the following equation 3.7:
in another possible embodiment, when the fourth information includes an SFN start time And A start time When processor 1301 determines the information of the start timing of the P-th first timer using the following equation 3.8:
in another possible embodiment, when the fourth information includes an SFN start time 、Q start time 、G start time B, B start time When processor 1301 determines the information of the start timing of the P-th first timer using the following equation 3.9:
in another possible embodiment, when the fourth information includes an SFN start time 、A start time B, B start time When processor 1301 determines the information of the start timing of the P-th first timer using the following equation 3.10:
in another possible embodimentWhen the fourth information includes SFN start time And Q start time When processor 1301 determines the information of the start timing of the P-th first timer using the following equation 3.11:
[(SFN×10)+Q]=F{[(SFN start time ×10+Q start time )+N×T DRX ]Mod (1024 x 10); (equation 3.11)
In another possible embodiment, when the fourth information includes an SFN start time 、Q start time G start time When processor 1301 determines the information of the start timing of the P-th first timer using the following equation 3.12:
in another possible embodiment, when the fourth information includes an SFN start time And A start time When processor 1301 determines the information of the start timing of the P-th first timer using the following equation 3.13:
in another possible embodiment, when the fourth information includes an SFN start time 、Q start time 、G start time B, B start time When processor 1301 determines the information of the start timing of the P-th first timer using the following equation 3.14:
in another possible embodiment, when the fourth information includes an SFN start time 、A start time B, B start time Processor 1301 then uses the following equation 3.15 to determine information about the start timing of the P first timer:
f { } in equations 3.6, 3.7, 3.8, 3.9, 3.10, 3.11, 3.12, 3.13, 3.14 and 3.15 may represent a rounding operation. Illustratively, F { } may be a downward rounding operation, e.g., floor () function; or a round-up operation, e.g., ceil () function; it may also be a rounding operation, e.g. round () function. The meaning of the remaining parameters is shown in the corresponding related descriptions of the formulas 3.1, 3.2, 3.3, 3.4 and 3.5, and will not be repeated here.
In one possible implementation, when the fourth information includes an SFN start time 、Q start time And R is start time Processor 1301 then determines the information of the start timing of the P-th first timer using the following equation 3.16:
[(SFN×10)+Q+R]=[(SFN start time ×10+Q start time +R start time )+N×T DRX ]mod (1024×10); (equation 3.16)
Wherein R is the duration of the starting time of the P first timer which is smaller than the corresponding time of one subframe, R start time And the starting time of the Mth first timer is less than the duration corresponding to one subframe.
In another possible embodiment, when the fourth information includes an SFN start time 、Q start time 、G start time R is as follows start time Processor 1301 then determines the information of the start timing of the P-th first timer using the following equation 3.17:
wherein R is the time length corresponding to less than one time slot of the starting time of the P first timer, R start time The starting time of the Mth first timer is less than the duration corresponding to one time slot.
In another possible embodiment, when the fourth information includes an SFN start time 、A start time And R is start time Processor 1301 then determines the information of the start timing of the P-th first timer using the following equation 3.18:
wherein R is the time length corresponding to less than one time slot of the starting time of the P first timer, R start time The starting time of the Mth first timer is less than the duration corresponding to one time slot.
In another possible embodiment, when the fourth information includes an SFN start time 、Q start time 、G start time 、B start time R is as follows start time Processor 1301 then determines the information of the start timing of the P-th first timer using the following equation 3.19:
wherein R is the duration of the starting time of the P first timer which is smaller than the corresponding time of one symbol, R start time And the starting time of the Mth first timer is less than the duration corresponding to one symbol.
In another possible embodiment, when the fourth information includes an SFN start time 、A start time 、B start time R is as follows start time Processor 1301 then uses equation 3.20 below to determine information on the start timing of the P first timer:
wherein R is the duration of the starting time of the P first timer which is smaller than the corresponding time of one symbol, R start time Is the MthThe start time of a timer is less than the duration corresponding to one symbol.
The meaning of the parameters in the formulas 3.16, 3.17, 3.18, 3.19 and 3.20 refer to the corresponding related descriptions of the formulas 3.1, 3.2, 3.3, 3.4 and 3.5, which are not described herein.
In one possible implementation, the communication device further includes a transceiver 1303. The transceiver 1303 is configured to receive second indication information from the network device, where the second indication information is configured to indicate information of a reference frame, and the information of the reference frame is configured to determine information of a start timing of the first timer.
Optionally, the frame number of the reference frame is 512 or 0.
In one possible implementation, the processor 1301 is specifically configured to determine the information of the start timing of the P-th first timer based on the fourth information, the information of the reference frame, and the first period, where the first period is equal to the cumulative sum of the (P-M) DRX cycles.
In one possible implementation, processor 1301 determines the start timing of the P first timer according to the following condition: the remainder of dividing the sum of the (P-M) DRX cycles, the fourth number, and the first number by the second number is equal to the third number.
The first number is the number of time domain units between the starting position of the superframe where the Mth first timer is located and the starting time of the Mth first timer; the second number is the number of time domain units contained in one superframe; the third number is the number of time domain units between the starting position of the superframe where the P first timer is located and the starting time of the P first timer; the fourth number is the number of time domain units between the start position of the superframe where the frame indicated by the third indication information is located and the frame indicated by the third indication information.
In one possible implementation, processor 1301 is specifically configured to determine the fourth number based on the information of the reference frame; determining a first number and a second number based on the fourth information; determining a remainder of dividing a sum of the cumulative sum of the first number, the fourth number, and the (P-M) DRX cycles by the second number to obtain a third number; the start time related information of the first timer in the P-th DRX cycle is determined based on the third number.
In a possible embodiment, when the fourth information includes a frame number SFN of the frame in which the start time domain unit is located start time And the subframe number Q of the starting time domain unit start time When the processor 1301 determines the information of the start timing of the P-th first timer based on the fourth information and the information of the reference frame, satisfying the following formula 4.1:
[(SFN×10)+Q]=[(SFN reference to ×10)+(SFN start time ×10+Q start time )+N×T DRX ]mod (d×10); (equation 4.1)
Wherein SFN Reference to Frame number of reference frame indicated for the second indication information. The SFN is the frame number of the start timing of the P-th first timer. Q is the subframe number of the starting time of the P first timer. SFN (SFN) start time Is the frame number of the starting time of the Mth first timer. Q (Q) start time Is the subframe number of the starting time of the Mth first timer. (N X T) DRX ) The first period is a unit of a subframe. T (T) DRX Representing the duration of one DRX cycle. Alternatively, the DRX cycle is a long DRX cycle (DRX-LongCycle). D is the number of frames that a superframe contains. Illustratively, d=1024, meaning that one superframe includes 1024 frames.
In another possible embodiment, when the fourth information includes a frame number SFN of the frame in which the start time domain unit is located start time Subframe number Q of subframe in which the start time domain unit is located start time Time slot number G of time domain unit start time When the processor 1301 determines the information of the start timing of the P-th first timer based on the fourth information and the information of the reference frame, satisfying the following formula 4.2:
wherein SFN Reference to The SFN is the starting time of the P first timer and is the frame number of the reference frame indicated by the second indication informationA frame number. Q is the subframe number of the starting time of the P first timer. G is the index of the time slot corresponding to the starting time of the P first timer in one subframe. SFN (SFN) start time Is the frame number of the starting time of the Mth first timer. Q (Q) start time Is the subframe number of the starting time of the Mth first timer. G start time And the index of the time slot corresponding to the starting time of the Mth first timer in one subframe.Is the number of slots contained in one subframe. (N X T) DRX ) The first period is a unit of a subframe. T (T) DRX Representing the duration of one DRX cycle. Alternatively, the DRX cycle is a long DRX cycle (DRX-LongCycle). D is the number of frames that a superframe contains. Illustratively, d=1024, meaning that one superframe includes 1024 frames.
In another possible embodiment, when the fourth information includes a frame number SFN of the frame in which the start time domain unit is located start time And time slot number A of time domain unit start time When the processor 1301 determines the information of the start timing of the P-th first timer based on the fourth information and the information of the reference frame, satisfying the following formula 4.3:
wherein SFN Reference to Frame number of reference frame indicated for the second indication information. The SFN is the frame number of the start timing of the P-th first timer. Q is the subframe number of the starting time of the P first timer. A is the index of the time slot corresponding to the starting time of the P first timer in a system frame. SFN (SFN) start time Is the frame number of the starting time of the Mth first timer. Q (Q) start time Is the subframe number of the starting time of the Mth first timer. A is that start time And the index of the time slot corresponding to the starting time of the Mth first timer in one system frame.Is the number of slots contained in one subframe. (N X T) DRX ) The first period is a unit of a subframe. T (T) DRX Representing the duration of one DRX cycle. Alternatively, the DRX cycle is a long DRX cycle (DRX-LongCycle). D is the number of frames that a superframe contains. Illustratively, d=1024, meaning that one superframe includes 1024 frames.
In another possible embodiment, when the fourth information includes a frame number SFN of the frame in which the start time domain unit is located start time Subframe number Q of subframe in which the start time domain unit is located start time Time slot number G of time slot where time domain unit is located start time Symbol number (or index of symbol) B of time cell start time When the processor 1301 determines the information of the start timing of the P-th first timer based on the fourth information and the information of the reference frame, satisfying the following formula 4.4:
wherein SFN Reference to The SFN is the frame number of the start timing of the P-th first timer, which is the frame number of the reference frame indicated by the second indication information. Q is the subframe number of the starting time of the P first timer. G is the index of the time slot corresponding to the starting time of the P first timer in one subframe. B is the symbol number of the starting time of the P first timer. SFN (SFN) start time Is the frame number of the starting time of the Mth first timer. Q (Q) start time Is the subframe number of the starting time of the Mth first timer. G start time And the index of the time slot corresponding to the starting time of the Mth first timer in one subframe. B (B) start time Is the symbol number of the starting time of the Mth first timer.Is the number of slots contained in one subframe.Is the number of slots contained in one frame. (N X T) DRX ) The first period is a unit of a subframe. T (T) DRX Representing the duration of one DRX cycle. Alternatively, the DRX cycle is a long DRX cycle (DRX-LongCycle). D is the number of frames that a superframe contains. Illustratively, d=1024, meaning that one superframe includes 1024 frames. H is the number of symbols contained in one slot. Illustratively, h=14, meaning that one slot includes 14 symbols. Illustratively, h=12, meaning that one slot includes 12 symbols.
In another possible embodiment, when the fourth information includes a frame number SFN of the frame in which the start time domain unit is located start time Time slot number A of time slot where time domain unit is located start time Symbol number (or index of symbol) B of time cell start time When the processor 1301 determines the information of the start timing of the P-th first timer based on the fourth information and the information of the reference frame, satisfying the following formula 4.5:
wherein SFN Reference to Frame number of reference frame indicated for the second indication information. The SFN is the frame number of the start timing of the P-th first timer. Q is the subframe number of the starting time of the P first timer. A is the index of the time slot corresponding to the starting time of the P first timer in a system frame. B is the symbol number of the starting time of the P first timer. SFN (SFN) start time Is the frame number of the starting time of the Mth first timer. Q (Q) start time Is the subframe number of the starting time of the Mth first timer. A is that start time And the index of the time slot corresponding to the starting time of the Mth first timer in one system frame. B (B) start time Is the symbol number of the starting time of the Mth first timer.Is the number of slots contained in one subframe.Is the number of slots contained in one frame. (N X T) DRX ) The first period is a unit of a subframe. T (T) DRX Representing the duration of one DRX cycle. Alternatively, the DRX cycle is a long DRX cycle (DRX-LongCycle). D is the number of frames that a superframe contains. Illustratively, d=1024, meaning that one superframe includes 1024 frames. H is the number of symbols contained in one slot. Illustratively, h=14, meaning that one slot includes 14 symbols. Illustratively, h=12, meaning that one slot includes 12 symbols.
In one possible implementation, when the fourth information includes an SFN start time And Q start time When processor 1301 determines the information of the start timing of the P-th first timer using the following equation 4.6:
[(SFN×10)+Q]=F{[(SFN reference to ×10)+(SFN start time ×10+Q start time )+N×T DRX ]mod (1024×10) }; (equation 4.6)
In another possible embodiment, when the fourth information includes an SFN start time 、Q start time G start time Processor 1301 then uses the following equation 4.7 to determine information about the start timing of the P first timer:
in another possible embodiment, when the fourth information includes an SFN start time And A start time When processor 1301 determines the information of the start timing of the P-th first timer using the following equation 4.8:
in another possible embodiment, when the fourth information includes an SFN start time 、Q start time 、G start time B, B start time Processor 1301 then determines the information of the start timing of the P-th first timer using the following equation 4.9:
In another possible embodiment, when the fourth information includes an SFN start time 、A start time B, B start time When processor 1301 determines the information of the start timing of the P-th first timer using the following equation 4.10:
in another possible embodiment, when the fourth information includes an SFN start time And Q start time When processor 1301 determines the information of the start timing of the P-th first timer using the following equation 4.11:
[(SFN×10)+Q]=F{[(SFN reference to ×10)+(SFN start time ×10+Q start time )+N×T DRX ]Mod (1024 x 10); (equation 4.11)
In another possible embodiment, when the fourth information includes an SFN start time 、Q start time G start time When processor 1301 determines the information of the start timing of the P-th first timer using the following equation 4.12:
in another possible embodiment, when the fourth information includes an SFN start time And A start time Processor 1301 then uses the following equation 4.13 to determine information about the start timing of the P first timer:
in another possible embodiment, when the fourth information includes an SFN start time 、Q start time 、G start time B, B start time Processor 1301 then uses the following equation 4.14 to determine information about the start timing of the P first timer:
in another possible embodiment, when the fourth information includes an SFN start time 、A start time B, B start time Processor 1301 then uses the following equation 4.15 to determine information about the start timing of the P first timer:
F { } in equations 4.6, 4.7, 4.8, 4.9, 4.10, 4.11, 4.12, 4.14 and 4.15 may represent a rounding operation. Illustratively, F { } may be a downward rounding operation, e.g., floor () function; or a round-up operation, e.g., ceil () function; it may also be a rounding operation, e.g. round () function. The meaning of the remaining parameters is shown in the corresponding related descriptions of the formulas 4.1, 4.2, 4.4 and 4.5, and will not be repeated here.
In one possible implementation, when the fourth information includes an SFN start time 、Q start time And R is start time Processor 1301 then uses the following equation 4.16 to determine information about the start timing of the P first timer:
[(SFN×10)+Q+R]=[(SFN reference to ×10)+(SFN start time ×10+Q start time )+R start time +N×T DRX ]mod (1024×10); (equation 4.16)
Wherein R is the duration of the starting time of the P first timer which is smaller than the corresponding time of one subframe, R start time And the starting time of the Mth first timer is less than the duration corresponding to one subframe.
In another possible embodiment, when the fourth information includes an SFN start time 、Q start time 、G start time R is as follows start time Processor 1301 then uses the following equation 4.17 to determine information about the start timing of the P first timer:
Wherein R is the time length corresponding to less than one time slot of the starting time of the P first timer, R start time The starting time of the Mth first timer is less than the duration corresponding to one time slot.
In another possible embodiment, when the fourth information includes an SFN start time 、A start time And R is start time Processor 1301 then determines the information of the start timing of the P-th first timer using the following equation 4.18:
wherein R is the time length corresponding to less than one time slot of the starting time of the P first timer, R start time The starting time of the Mth first timer is less than the duration corresponding to one time slot.
In another possible embodiment, when the fourth information includes an SFN start time 、Q start time 、G start time 、B start time R is as follows start time Processor 1301 then uses equation 4.19 below to determine information about the start timing of the P first timer:
wherein R is the duration of the starting time of the P first timer which is smaller than the corresponding time of one symbol, R start time And the starting time of the Mth first timer is less than the duration corresponding to one symbol.
In another possible embodiment, when the fourth information includes an SFN start time 、A start time 、B start time R is as follows start time Processor 1301 then uses equation 4.20 below to determine information on the start timing of the P first timer:
wherein R is the duration of the starting time of the P first timer which is smaller than the corresponding time of one symbol, R start time And the starting time of the Mth first timer is less than the duration corresponding to one symbol.
The meaning of the parameters in the formulas 4.16, 4.17, 4.18, 4.19 and 4.20 refer to the corresponding related descriptions of the formulas 4.1, 4.2, 4.4 and 4.5, which are not described herein.
It should be noted that, the specific implementation and the beneficial effects of the present embodiment may refer to the method of the terminal device in the foregoing embodiment, which is not described herein again.
In implementation, the steps of the above method may be performed by integrated logic circuits of hardware in a processor or by instructions in the form of software. The steps of a method disclosed in connection with the embodiments of the present application may be embodied directly in a hardware processor for execution, or in a combination of hardware and software modules in the processor for execution. The software modules may be located in a random access memory, flash memory, read only memory, programmable read only memory, or electrically erasable programmable memory, registers, etc. as well known in the art. The storage medium is located in a memory and the processor reads the information in the memory and, in combination with its hardware, performs the steps of the above method. To avoid repetition, a detailed description is not provided herein.
Furthermore, the present application provides a computer program product comprising one or more computer instructions. When the computer program instructions are loaded and executed on a computer, the processes or functions in accordance with embodiments of the present application are produced in whole or in part. For example, the method associated with the network device as in fig. 2, 3, 5, 6, 9, or 10 described above is implemented. As another example, the method related to the terminal device in fig. 2, 3, 5, 6, 9 or 10 as described above is implemented. The computer may be a general purpose computer, a special purpose computer, a computer network, or other programmable apparatus. The computer instructions may be stored in a computer-readable storage medium or transmitted from one computer-readable storage medium to another computer-readable storage medium, for example, the computer instructions may be transmitted from one website, computer, server, or data center to another website, computer, server, or data center by a wired (e.g., coaxial cable, fiber optic, digital subscriber line (digital subscriber line, DSL)) or wireless (e.g., infrared, wireless, microwave, etc.). Computer readable storage media can be any available media that can be stored by a computer or data storage devices such as servers, data centers, etc. that contain an integration of one or more available media. Usable media may be magnetic media (e.g., floppy disks, hard disks, magnetic tapes), optical media (e.g., digital versatile discs (digital versatile disc, DVDs)), or semiconductor media (e.g., solid State Disks (SSDs)), or the like.
Furthermore, the present application provides a computer readable storage medium storing a computer program for execution by a processor to implement a method related to a network device as in the foregoing fig. 2, 3, 5, 6, 9 or 10.
Furthermore, the present application provides a computer-readable storage medium storing a computer program to be executed by a processor to implement a method related to a terminal device as in the foregoing fig. 2, 3, 5, 6, 9 or 10.
It should be understood that, in various embodiments of the present application, the sequence numbers of the foregoing processes do not mean the order of execution, and the order of execution of the processes should be determined by the functions and internal logic thereof, and should not constitute any limitation on the implementation process of the embodiments of the present application. In addition, the method embodiments described above may be implemented alone or in combination. The terminology and related techniques involved in the various embodiments may be referenced to each other. That is, the technical solutions of different embodiments that do not contradict or logically conflict can be combined, and the present application is not limited.
It will be clear to those skilled in the art that, for convenience and brevity of description, specific working procedures of the above-described systems, apparatuses and units may refer to corresponding procedures in the foregoing method embodiments, which are not repeated herein.

Claims (35)

1. A method of communication, comprising:
the method comprises the steps that a terminal device obtains first information, wherein the first information is different from second information, the first information is used for determining starting time of a first timer in a first superframe, and the second information is used for determining starting time of the first timer in a second superframe;
the terminal device determines a start timing of the first timer in the first superframe based on the first information.
2. The method of claim 1, wherein the first information and the second information are different values of a same parameter.
3. The method according to claim 1 or 2, wherein the first superframe and the second superframe satisfy the following conditions within one superframe period:
the first superframe is adjacent to the second superframe; or, the first superframe is separated from the second superframe by at least one superframe; wherein the one superframe period includes at least two superframes.
4. A method according to any one of claims 1 to 3, wherein the terminal device obtains the first information, comprising:
the terminal equipment determines the first information based on third information;
Wherein the third information is determined by the terminal device based on an index of the first superframe; alternatively, the third information is from a network device.
5. The method of claim 4, wherein the third information is determined by the terminal device based on an index of the first superframe and N, wherein N is a number of superframes included in the superframe period, and N is an integer greater than 1.
6. The method according to claim 5, wherein the third information C 1 Index S of the first superframe 1 The following conditions are satisfied with the N: c (C) 1 =S 1 mod N。
7. The method according to any one of claims 3 to 6, wherein the superframe period satisfies the following condition: the superframe period is equal to an integer multiple of a Discontinuous Reception (DRX) period corresponding to the first timer.
8. The method according to any one of claims 1 to 7, wherein the terminal device determining a start timing of the first timer in the first superframe based on the first information, comprises:
and the terminal equipment determines the starting time of the first timer in the first superframe based on the first information and a first parameter, wherein the first parameter is drx-StartOffset.
9. The method according to any one of claims 1 to 7, wherein,
the terminal device determining, based on the first information, a start timing of the first timer in the first superframe, including:
the terminal equipment determines the starting time of the first timer in the first superframe based on a second parameter and the first information; or,
the terminal equipment determines a first reference value based on a second parameter, and determines the starting time of the first timer in the first superframe based on the first reference value and the first information;
wherein the second parameter is drx-SlotOffset.
10. The method according to any of claims 1 to 7, characterized in that the first information is drx-StartOffset or drx-SlotOffset.
11. The method according to any one of claims 1 to 10, further comprising:
the terminal device determines the index of the first superframe according to one of:
the terminal equipment determines the index of the first superframe according to first indication information; or,
the terminal equipment determines the index of the first superframe according to the first indication information and the first time information;
The first indication information is from a network device, and the first time information comprises information of time for the terminal device to acquire DRX configuration.
12. The method of claim 11, wherein the first indication information is used to instruct the network device to transmit the DRX configuration in a second half of a superframe or the first indication information is used to instruct the network device to transmit the DRX configuration in a first half of a superframe.
13. The method according to any one of claims 1 to 12, wherein the first superframe is a superframe at which a timing at which the terminal device acquires a DRX configuration is located.
14. The method of claim 13, wherein the terminal device determining the index of the first superframe comprises:
if the first indication information indicates that the network device sends the DRX configuration in the second half of a superframe, and the moment when the terminal device obtains the DRX configuration is in the first half of the superframe, the terminal device determines that the index of the first superframe is (L+1); or,
the moment when the terminal equipment acquires the DRX configuration is in the second half of the first superframe, and the terminal equipment determines that the index of the first superframe is L; or,
If the first indication information indicates that the network device sends the DRX configuration in the first half of a superframe, the terminal device determines that the index of the first superframe is L;
wherein L is greater than or equal to 0.
15. The method according to any one of claims 1 to 14, wherein the first timer is a discontinuous reception persistence timer.
16. A method of communication, comprising:
the network equipment determines first information, which is different from second information, wherein the first information is used for determining the starting time of a first timer in a first superframe, and the second information is used for determining the starting time of the first timer in a second superframe;
the network device sends the first information to a terminal device.
17. A method of communication, comprising:
the terminal equipment acquires fourth information, wherein the fourth information comprises information of starting time of an M-th first timer, and M is an integer greater than or equal to 0;
and the terminal equipment determines the information of the starting time of the P first timer based on the fourth information, wherein P is an integer greater than 0.
18. The method of claim 17, wherein the information of the start opportunity of the mth first timer comprises information of the following time domain units:
Frames and subframes; or, frames, subframes, and slots; or, frames and slots; or, frames, subframes, slots, and symbols; or frames, slots, and symbols.
19. The method according to claim 17 or 18, wherein the terminal device determines information of a start timing of a P-th first timer based on the fourth information, comprising:
the terminal device determines information of start timing of the P-th first timer based on the fourth information and a first period, wherein the first period is equal to a cumulative sum of N DRX periods, and N is equal to (P-M).
20. The method according to any one of claims 17 to 19, wherein the DRX cycle is an integer;
if the information of the start time of the mth first timer comprises a frame and a subframe, the terminal equipment determines the information of the start time of the P first timer based on the fourth information, and the following formula is satisfied:
[(SFN×10)+Q]=[(SFN starttime ×10+Q starttime )+N×T DRX ]mod (1024×10); or,
if the information of the start time of the mth first timer includes a frame, a subframe and a time slot, the terminal device determines the information of the start time of the P first timer based on the fourth information, and satisfies the following formula:
Or,
if the information of the start time of the mth first timer includes a frame and a time slot, the terminal device determines the information of the start time of the P first timer based on the fourth information, and satisfies the following formula:
or,
if the information of the start time of the mth first timer comprises a frame, a subframe, a time slot and a symbol, the terminal equipment determines the information of the start time of the P first timer based on the fourth information, and the following formula is satisfied:
or,
if the information of the start time of the mth first timer comprises a frame, a time slot and a symbol, the terminal equipment determines the information of the start time of the P first timer based on the fourth information, and the following formula is satisfied:
wherein SFN is the frame number of the starting time of the P first timer, Q is the subframe number of the starting time of the P first timer, A is the index of the time slot corresponding to the starting time of the P first timer in one system frame, B is the symbol number of the starting time of the P first timer, G is the index of the time slot corresponding to the starting time of the P first timer in one subframe, SFN starttime Frame number Q of starting time of Mth first timer starttime A is the subframe number of the starting time of the M first timer, A starttime Index of time slot corresponding to starting time of Mth first timer in one system frame, B starttime Symbol number G which is the starting time of the M th first timer starttime An index of a time slot corresponding to the starting time of the Mth first timer in one subframe,for the number of slots contained in one subframe,is the number of slots contained in one frame, (n×t) DRX ) For the first period, the unit of the first period is a subframe, T DRX For the DRX cycle, H is the number of symbols contained in one slot.
21. The method according to any one of claims 17 to 19, wherein the DRX cycle is a non-integer value;
if the information of the start time of the mth first timer comprises a frame and a subframe, the terminal equipment determines the information of the start time of the P first timer based on the fourth information, and the following formula is satisfied:
[(SFN×10)+Q]=F{[(SFN starttime ×10+Q starttime )+N×T DRX ]mod (1024×10) }; or,
if the information of the start time of the mth first timer includes a frame, a subframe and a time slot, the terminal device determines the information of the start time of the P first timer based on the fourth information, and satisfies the following formula:
Or,
if the information of the start time of the mth first timer includes a frame and a time slot, the terminal device determines the information of the start time of the P first timer based on the fourth information, and satisfies the following formula:
or,
if the information of the start time of the mth first timer comprises a frame, a subframe, a time slot and a symbol, the terminal equipment determines the information of the start time of the P first timer based on the fourth information, and the following formula is satisfied:
or,
if the information of the start time of the mth first timer comprises a frame, a time slot and a symbol, the terminal equipment determines the information of the start time of the P first timer based on the fourth information, and the following formula is satisfied:
wherein SFN is the frame number of the starting time of the P first timer, Q is the subframe number of the starting time of the P first timer, A is the index of the time slot corresponding to the starting time of the P first timer in one system frame, B is the symbol number of the starting time of the P first timer, G is the index of the time slot corresponding to the starting time of the P first timer in one subframe, SFN starttime Frame number Q of starting time of Mth first timer starttime A is the subframe number of the starting time of the M first timer, A starttime Index of time slot corresponding to starting time of Mth first timer in one system frame, B starttime Symbol number G which is the starting time of the M th first timer starttime An index of a time slot corresponding to the starting time of the Mth first timer in one subframe,for the number of slots contained in one subframe,is the number of slots contained in one frame, (n×t) DRX ) For the first period, the unit of the first period is a subframe, T DRX For the DRX cycle, H is the number of symbols contained in one slot, and F { } represents any one of a rounding operation up, a rounding operation down, or a rounding operation.
22. The method according to any one of claims 17 to 19, wherein the DRX cycle is a non-integer value;
if the information of the start time of the mth first timer comprises a frame and a subframe, the terminal equipment determines the information of the start time of the P first timer based on the fourth information, and the following formula is satisfied:
[(SFN×10)+Q]=F{[(SFN starttime ×10+Q starttime )+N×T DRX ]mod (1024 x 10); or,
if the information of the start time of the mth first timer includes a frame, a subframe and a time slot, the terminal device determines the information of the start time of the P first timer based on the fourth information, and satisfies the following formula:
Or,
if the information of the start time of the mth first timer includes a frame and a time slot, the terminal device determines the information of the start time of the P first timer based on the fourth information, and satisfies the following formula:
or,
if the information of the start time of the mth first timer comprises a frame, a subframe, a time slot and a symbol, the terminal equipment determines the information of the start time of the P first timer based on the fourth information, and the following formula is satisfied:
or,
if the information of the start time of the mth first timer comprises a frame, a time slot and a symbol, the terminal equipment determines the information of the start time of the P first timer based on the fourth information, and the following formula is satisfied:
wherein SFN is the frame number of the starting time of the P first timer, Q is the subframe number of the starting time of the P first timer, A is the index of the time slot corresponding to the starting time of the P first timer in one system frame, B is the symbol number of the starting time of the P first timer, G is the index of the time slot corresponding to the starting time of the P first timer in one subframe, SFN starttime Frame number Q of starting time of Mth first timer starttime A is the subframe number of the starting time of the M first timer, A starttime Index of time slot corresponding to starting time of Mth first timer in one system frame, B starttime Symbol number G which is the starting time of the M th first timer starttime An index of a time slot corresponding to the starting time of the Mth first timer in one subframe,for the number of slots contained in one subframe,is the number of slots contained in one frame, (n×t) DRX ) For the first period, the unit of the first period is a subframe, T DRX For the DRX cycle, H is the number of symbols contained in one slot, and F { } represents any one of a rounding operation up, a rounding operation down, or a rounding operation.
23. The method according to any one of claims 17 to 19, wherein the DRX cycle is a non-integer value;
if the information of the start time of the mth first timer comprises a frame and a subframe, the terminal equipment determines the information of the start time of the P first timer based on the fourth information, and the following formula is satisfied:
[(SFN×10)+Q+R]=[(SFN starttime ×10+Q starttime +R starttime )+N×T DRX ]mod (1024×10); or,
if the information of the start time of the mth first timer includes a frame, a subframe and a time slot, the terminal device determines the information of the start time of the P first timer based on the fourth information, and satisfies the following formula:
Or,
if the information of the start time of the mth first timer includes a frame and a time slot, the terminal device determines the information of the start time of the P first timer based on the fourth information, and satisfies the following formula:
or,
if the information of the start time of the mth first timer comprises a frame, a subframe, a time slot and a symbol, the terminal equipment determines the information of the start time of the P first timer based on the fourth information, and the following formula is satisfied:
or,
if the information of the start time of the mth first timer comprises a frame, a time slot and a symbol, the terminal equipment determines the information of the start time of the P first timer based on the fourth information, and the following formula is satisfied:
wherein SFN is the frame number of the starting time of the P first timer, Q is the subframe number of the starting time of the P first timer, A is the index of the time slot corresponding to the starting time of the P first timer in one system frame, B is the symbol number of the starting time of the P first timer, G is the index of the time slot corresponding to the starting time of the P first timer in one subframe, SFN starttime Frame number Q of starting time of Mth first timer starttime A is the subframe number of the starting time of the M first timer, A starttime Index of time slot corresponding to starting time of Mth first timer in one system frame, B starttime Symbol number G which is the starting time of the M th first timer starttime An index of a time slot corresponding to the starting time of the Mth first timer in one subframe,for the number of slots contained in one subframe,is the number of slots contained in one frame, (n×t) DRX ) For the first period, the unit of the first period is a subframe, T DRX For the DRX cycle, H is the number of symbols contained in one slot.
24. The method according to any one of claims 17 to 23, further comprising:
the terminal device receives second indication information from the network device, wherein the second indication information is used for indicating information of a reference frame, and the information of the reference frame is used for determining information of starting time of the first timer.
25. The method according to claim 24, wherein the terminal device determining information about a start timing of the P-th first timer based on the fourth information, comprises:
the terminal device determines information of a start timing of the P-th first timer based on the fourth information, the information of the reference frame, and a first period, the first period being equal to a cumulative sum of N DRX cycles, the N being equal to (P-M).
26. The method according to claim 24 or 25, wherein the frame number of the reference frame is 512 or 0.
27. The method according to any one of claims 24 to 26, wherein the DRX cycle is an integer;
if the information of the start time of the mth first timer comprises a frame and a subframe, the terminal equipment determines the information of the start time of the P first timer based on the fourth information, and the following formula is satisfied:
[(SFN×10)+Q]=[(SFN reference to ×10)+(SFN starttime ×10+Q starttime )+N×T DRX ]mod (1024×10); or,
if the information of the start time of the mth first timer includes a frame, a subframe and a time slot, the terminal device determines the information of the start time of the P first timer based on the fourth information, and satisfies the following formula:
or,
if the information of the start time of the mth first timer includes a frame and a time slot, the terminal device determines the information of the start time of the P first timer based on the fourth information, and satisfies the following formula:
or,
if the information of the start time of the mth first timer comprises a frame, a subframe, a time slot and a symbol, the terminal equipment determines the information of the start time of the P first timer based on the fourth information, and the following formula is satisfied:
Or,
if the information of the start time of the mth first timer comprises a frame, a time slot and a symbol, the terminal equipment determines the information of the start time of the P first timer based on the fourth information, and the following formula is satisfied:
wherein SFN Reference to The SFN is the frame number of the starting time of the P first timer, Q is the subframe number of the starting time of the P first timer, A is the index of the time slot corresponding to the starting time of the P first timer in a system frame, G is the starting time of the P first timerIndex of corresponding time slot in one subframe, B is symbol number of starting time of P first timer, SFN starttime Frame number Q of starting time of Mth first timer starttime A is the subframe number of the starting time of the M first timer, A starttime Index of time slot corresponding to starting time of Mth first timer in one system frame, B starttime Symbol number G which is the starting time of the M th first timer starttime An index of a time slot corresponding to the starting time of the Mth first timer in one subframe,for the number of slots contained in one subframe, +. >Is the number of slots contained in one frame, (n×t) DRX ) For the first period, the unit of the first period is a subframe, T DRX For the DRX cycle, H is the number of symbols contained in one slot.
28. The method according to any one of claims 24 to 26, wherein the DRX cycle is a non-integer value;
if the information of the start time of the mth first timer comprises a frame and a subframe, the terminal equipment determines the information of the start time of the P first timer based on the fourth information, and the following formula is satisfied:
[(SFN×10)+Q]=F{[(SFN reference to ×10)+(SFN starttime ×10+Q starttime )+N×T DRX ]mod (1024×10) }; or,
if the information of the start time of the mth first timer includes a frame, a subframe and a time slot, the terminal device determines the information of the start time of the P first timer based on the fourth information, and satisfies the following formula:
or,
if the information of the start time of the mth first timer includes a frame and a time slot, the terminal device determines the information of the start time of the P first timer based on the fourth information, and satisfies the following formula:
or,
if the information of the start time of the mth first timer comprises a frame, a subframe, a time slot and a symbol, the terminal equipment determines the information of the start time of the P first timer based on the fourth information, and the following formula is satisfied: Or,
if the information of the start time of the mth first timer comprises a frame, a time slot and a symbol, the terminal equipment determines the information of the start time of the P first timer based on the fourth information, and the following formula is satisfied:
wherein SFN Reference to The SFN is the frame number of the starting time of the P first timer, and Q is the P first timerThe subframe number of the starting time of the timer, A is the index of the time slot corresponding to the starting time of the P-th first timer in one system frame, G is the index of the time slot corresponding to the starting time of the P-th first timer in one subframe, B is the symbol number of the starting time of the P-th first timer, SFN starttime Frame number Q of starting time of Mth first timer starttime A is the subframe number of the starting time of the M first timer, A starttime Index of time slot corresponding to starting time of Mth first timer in one system frame, B starttime Symbol number G which is the starting time of the M th first timer starttime An index of a time slot corresponding to the starting time of the Mth first timer in one subframe,for the number of slots contained in one subframe, +. >Is the number of slots contained in one frame, (n×t) DRX ) For the first period, the unit of the first period is a subframe, T DRX For the DRX cycle, H is the number of symbols contained in one slot, and F { } represents any one of a rounding operation up, a rounding operation down, or a rounding operation.
29. The method according to any one of claims 24 to 26, wherein the DRX cycle is a non-integer value;
if the information of the start time of the mth first timer comprises a frame and a subframe, the terminal equipment determines the information of the start time of the P first timer based on the fourth information, and the following formula is satisfied:
[(SFN×10)+Q]=F{[(SFN reference to ×10)+(SFN starttime ×10+Q starttime )+N×T DRX ]Mod (1024 x 10); or,
if the information of the start time of the mth first timer includes a frame, a subframe and a time slot, the terminal device determines the information of the start time of the P first timer based on the fourth information, and satisfies the following formula:
or,
if the information of the start time of the mth first timer includes a frame and a time slot, the terminal device determines the information of the start time of the P first timer based on the fourth information, and satisfies the following formula:
Or,
if the information of the start time of the mth first timer comprises a frame, a subframe, a time slot and a symbol, the terminal equipment determines the information of the start time of the P first timer based on the fourth information, and the following formula is satisfied:
or,
if the information of the start time of the mth first timer comprises a frame, a time slot and a symbol, the terminal equipment determines the information of the start time of the P first timer based on the fourth information, and the following formula is satisfied:
wherein SFN Reference to The SFN is the frame number of the reference frame indicated by the second indication information, Q is the subframe number of the starting time of the P first timer, A is the index of the time slot corresponding to the starting time of the P first timer in a system frame, G is the index of the time slot corresponding to the starting time of the P first timer in a subframe, B is the symbol number of the starting time of the P first timer, SFN starttime Frame number Q of starting time of Mth first timer starttime A is the subframe number of the starting time of the M first timer, A starttime Index of time slot corresponding to starting time of Mth first timer in one system frame, B starttime Symbol number G which is the starting time of the M th first timer starttime An index of a time slot corresponding to the starting time of the Mth first timer in one subframe,for the number of slots contained in one subframe, +.>Is the number of slots contained in one frame, (n×t) DRX ) For the first period, the unit of the first period is a subframe, T DRX For the DRX cycle, H is the number of symbols contained in one slot, and F { } represents any one of a rounding operation up, a rounding operation down, or a rounding operation.
30. The method according to any one of claims 24 to 26, wherein the DRX cycle is an integer;
if the information of the start time of the mth first timer comprises a frame and a subframe, the terminal equipment determines the information of the start time of the P first timer based on the fourth information, and the following formula is satisfied:
[(SFN×10)+Q+R]=[(SFN reference to ×10)+(SFN starttime ×10+Q starttime )+R starttime +N×T DRX ]mod (1024×10); or,
if the information of the start time of the mth first timer includes a frame, a subframe and a time slot, the terminal device determines the information of the start time of the P first timer based on the fourth information, and satisfies the following formula:
Or,
if the information of the start time of the mth first timer includes a frame and a time slot, the terminal device determines the information of the start time of the P first timer based on the fourth information, and satisfies the following formula:
or,
if the information of the start time of the mth first timer comprises a frame, a subframe, a time slot and a symbol, the terminal equipment determines the information of the start time of the P first timer based on the fourth information, and the following formula is satisfied: or,
if the information of the start time of the mth first timer comprises a frame, a time slot and a symbol, the terminal equipment determines the information of the start time of the P first timer based on the fourth information, and the following formula is satisfied:
wherein SFN Reference to The SFN is the frame number of the reference frame indicated by the second indication information, Q is the subframe number of the starting time of the P first timer, A is the index of the time slot corresponding to the starting time of the P first timer in a system frame, G is the index of the time slot corresponding to the starting time of the P first timer in a subframe, B is the symbol number of the starting time of the P first timer, SFN starttime Frame number Q of starting time of Mth first timer starttime A is the subframe number of the starting time of the M first timer, A starttime Index of time slot corresponding to starting time of Mth first timer in one system frame, B starttime Symbol number G which is the starting time of the M th first timer starttime An index of a time slot corresponding to the starting time of the Mth first timer in one subframe,for the number of slots contained in one subframe, +.>Is the number of slots contained in one frame, (n×t) DRX ) For the first period, the unit of the first period is a subframe, T DRX For the DRX cycle, H is the number of symbols contained in one slot.
31. The method of any one of claims 17 to 30, wherein the first timer is a discontinuous reception persistence timer.
32. A method of communication, comprising:
the network equipment acquires fourth information, wherein the fourth information comprises information of starting time of an M-th first timer, and M is an integer greater than or equal to 0;
the network device sends the fourth information to a terminal device, wherein the fourth information is used for the terminal device to determine information of starting time of a P-th first timer based on the fourth information, P is an integer greater than 0, and P is greater than M.
33. A communication device comprising a processor and a memory;
wherein the memory stores a computer program;
the processor invokes the computer program to cause the communication device to perform the method of any one of claims 1 to 15 or to perform the method of any one of claims 17 to 31.
34. A communication device comprising a processor and a memory;
wherein the memory stores a computer program;
the processor invokes the computer program to cause the communication device to perform the method of claim 16 or to perform the method of claim 32.
35. A computer readable storage medium storing instructions which, when run on a computer, cause the computer to perform the method of any one of claims 1 to 32.
CN202210928227.7A 2022-04-29 2022-08-03 Communication method and communication device Pending CN117015080A (en)

Priority Applications (1)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
PCT/CN2023/087495 WO2023207576A1 (en) 2022-04-29 2023-04-11 Communication method and communication apparatus

Applications Claiming Priority (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
CN2022104676126 2022-04-29
CN202210467612 2022-04-29

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
CN117015080A true CN117015080A (en) 2023-11-07

Family

ID=88562455

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
CN202210928227.7A Pending CN117015080A (en) 2022-04-29 2022-08-03 Communication method and communication device

Country Status (1)

Country Link
CN (1) CN117015080A (en)

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
US11832337B2 (en) Method and device for determining timer configuration
US20210219341A1 (en) Method and apparatus for transmitting indication information
EP4009710A1 (en) Power-saving signal configuration and transmission methods and apparatuses
TWI575982B (en) System and method for selective prevention of transmitting a scheduling request
CN112399571B (en) Communication method and device
JP2012114915A (en) System and method for mac layer clock drift compensation, beacon transmission method, program, and wireless communication terminal
US20190081769A1 (en) Resource determining method, related device, and system
CN111436164B (en) Communication method and device
CN111436102A (en) Channel detection method and device
CN115226187A (en) Configuration method and device for discontinuous reception
WO2023279865A1 (en) Communication method and apparatus
CN110830206A (en) PDCCH (physical Downlink control channel) determination and synchronization signal detection and transmission methods and devices, storage medium, terminal and base station
CN112312525B (en) Power-saving signal configuration and transmission method and device
CN111436101A (en) Communication method and device
CN113260022B (en) Signal transmission method and equipment
CN112312524B (en) Power-saving signal configuration and transmission method and device
CN117015080A (en) Communication method and communication device
WO2023207576A1 (en) Communication method and communication apparatus
WO2015039626A1 (en) Method, system and device for data transmission and reception
US20200015204A1 (en) Communication Method, Terminal Device and Network Device
WO2024027418A1 (en) Communication method and communication apparatus
CN108075869B (en) Wakeup frame generation and decoding method and device
WO2018171087A1 (en) Wireless wake up method, control device and station device
CN110830207A (en) Information sending and receiving method, equipment and device
WO2023010905A1 (en) Discontinuous reception method and device

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
PB01 Publication
PB01 Publication